The Sacred Magic

www.deeptrancenow.
com
The Sacred Magic

of Abramelin the Mage
www.deeptrancenow.com
CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION BY S.L. MAC GREGOR MATHERS.

APPENDIX A. Table of Hebrew and Chaldee Letters.
APPENDIX B. Employment of a child-clairvoyant by Cagliostro.
APPENDIX C. Examples of other methods of angelic evocation.
THE FIRST BOOK
CHAPTER 1.
CHAPTER 2.
CHAPTER 3.
CHAPTER 4.
CHAPTER 5.
CHAPTER 6.
CHAPTER 7.
CHAPTER 8.
CHAPTER 9.
CHAPTER 10.
CHAPTER 11.
CHAPTER 12.
THE SECOND BOOK
Prologue
CHAPTER 1. What and how many be the forms of veritable magic.
CHAPTER 2. What we should consider before undertaking this
operation.
CHAPTER 3. Of the age and quality of the person who wisheth to
undertake this operation.
CHAPTER 4. That the greater number of magical books are false
and vain.
CHAPTER 5. That in this operation it is not necessary to regard
the time, nor the day, nor the hours.
CHAPTER 6. Concerning the planetary hours and other errors of
the astrologers.
CHAPTER 7. What should be accomplished during the first two
Moons of the beginning of this veritable and sacred magic.
CHAPTER 8. Concerning the two second Moons.
CHAPTER 9. Concerning the two last Moons.
CHAPTER 10. Concerning what things a man may learn and study
during these two Moons.
CHAPTER 11. Concerning the selection of the place.

CHAPTER 12. How one should keep oneself in order to carry out
this operation well.
CHAPTER 13. Concerning the convocation of the good spirits.
CHAPTER 14. Concerning the convocation of the spirits.
CHAPTER 15. Concerning what you should demand of the spirits
who are divided into three different troops and convoked on three
separate days
CHAPTER 16. Concerning the sending them away.
CHAPTER 17. What we should answer unto the interrogations of
the spirits, and how we should resist their demands.
CHAPTER 18. How he who operateth should behave as regardeth
the spirits.
CHAPTER 19. A descriptive list of the names of the spirits whom
we may summon to obtain that which we desire.
CHAPTER 20. How the operations should be performed.
THE THIRD BOOK
CHAPTER 1.
CHAPTER 2.
CHAPTER 3.
CHAPTER 4.
CHAPTER 5.
CHAPTER 6.
CHAPTER 7.
CHAPTER 8.
CHAPTER 9.
CHAPTER 10.
CHAPTER 11.
CHAPTER 12.
CHAPTER 13.
CHAPTER 14.
CHAPTER 15.
CHAPTER 16.
CHAPTER 17.
CHAPTER 18.
CHAPTER 19.
CHAPTER 20.
CHAPTER 21.
CHAPTER 22.
CHAPTER 23.
CHAPTER 24.
CHAPTER 25.
CHAPTER 26.
CHAPTER 27.
CHAPTER 28.
CHAPTER 29.
CHAPTER 30.
Introduction by S. L. Mac Gregor Mathers

Owing perhaps to the circumstance that the indispensable "Baedecker"
accords only a three or four line notice to the "Bibliothque de l'Arsenal";
but few English or American visitors to Paris are acquainted with its ame,
situation, or contents, though nearly all know at least by sight the
"Bibliothque Nationale" and the "Bibliothque Mazarin".
This "Library of the Arsenal," as it is now called, was founded as a private
collection by Antoine Ren Voyer D'Argenson, Marquis de Paulny, and
was first opened to the public on the 9th Floral, in the fifth year of the
French Republic (that is to say, on 28th April, 1797), or just a century ago.
This Marquis de Paulny was born in the year 1722, died in 1787, and was
successively Minister of War, and Ambassador to Switzerland, to Poland,
and to the Venetian Republic. His later years were devoted to the
formation of this library, said to be one of the richest private collections
known. It was acquired in 1785 by the Comte D'Artois, and today belongs
to the State. It is situated on the Right Bank of the Seine, in the Rue de
Sully, near the river, and not far from the Place de la Bastille, and is
known as the "Bibliothque de l'Arsenal". In round numbers it now
possesses 700,000 printed books, and about 8000 manuscripts, many of
them being of considerable value.
Among the latter is this Book of the Sacred Magic of Abra-Melin, as
delivered by Abraham the Jew unto his son Lamech; which I now give to
the public in printed form for the first time.
Many years ago I heard of the existence of this manuscript from a
celebrated occultist, since dead; and more recently my attention was
again called to it by my personal friend, the well-known French author,
lecturer, and poet, Jules Bois, whose attention has been for some time
turned to occult subjects. My first-mentioned informant told me that it was
known both to Bulwer Lytton and Eliphas Levi, that the former had based
part of his description of the sage Rosicrucian Mejnour on that of AbraMelin, while the account of the so-called observatory of Sir Philip Derval
in the Strange Story was to an extent copied from and suggested by that
of the magical oratory and terrace, given in the eleventh chapter of the
second book of this present work. Certainly also the manner of instruction
applied by Mejnour in Zanoni to the neophyte Glyndon, together with the
test of leaving him alone in his abode to go on a short journey and then
returning unexpectedly, is closely similar to that employed by Abra-Melin
to Abraham, with this difference, that the latter successfully passed

through that test, while Glyndon failed. It would also be especially such
experiments as those described at length in the third book, which the
author of the Strange Story had in view when he makes Sir Philip Derval
in the MS. history of his life speak of certain books describing occult
experiments, some of which he had tried and to his surprise found
succeed.
This rare and unique manuscript of the Sacred Magic of Abra-Melin, from
which the present work is translated, is a French translation from the
original Hebrew of Abraham the Jew. It is in the style of script usual at
about the end of the seventeenth and beginning of the eighteenth
centuries, and is apparently by the same hand as another MS. of the
Magic of Picatrix2 also in the "Bibliothque de L'Arsenal". I know of no
other existing copy or replica of this Sacred Magic of Abra-Melin, not even
in the British Museum, whose enormous collection of occult manuscripts I
have very thoroughly studied. Neither have I ever heard by traditional
report of the existence of any other copy.3 In giving it now to the public, I
feel, therefore, that I am conferring a real benefit upon English and
especially American students of occultism, by placing within their reach
for the first time a magical work of such importance from the occult
standpoint.
The manuscript is divided into three books, each with its separate title
page, surrounded by an ornamental border of simple design, in red and
black ink, and which is evidently not intended to be symbolical in the
slightest degree, but is simply the work of a conscientious caligraphist
wishing to give an appearance of cleanness and completeness to the title
page. The wording of each is the same: "Livre Premier (Second or
Troisime, as the case may be) de la Sacre Magie que Dieu donna
Moyse, Aaron, David, Salomon et d'autres Saints Patriarches et
Prophetes qui enseigne la vraye sapience Divine laisse par Abraham
Lamech son Fils traduite de l'hbreu 1458". I give the translated title at
the commencement of each of the three books.
On the fly-leaf of the original MS. is the following note in the handwriting
of the end of the eighteenth century:
"This volume contains three books, of which here is the first. The
Abraham and the Lamech, of whom there is here made question, were
Jews of the fifteenth century, and it is well known that the Jews of that
period possessing the Cabala of Solomon passed for being the best
sorcerers and astrologers." Then follows in another and recent hand:
"Volume composed of three parts
102 pages.
1st part
nd
2
194 "
3rd "
117 "
413 "
June, 1883."
The style of the French employed in the text of the MS. is somewhat
vague and obscure, two qualities unhappily heightened by the almost
entire absence of any attempt at punctuation, and the comparative rarity
of paragraphic arrangement. Even the full stop at the close of a sentence
is usually omitted, neither is the commencement of a fresh one marked by
a capital letter.
The following example is taken from near the end of the third book;
"Cest pourquoy la premiere chose que tu dois faire principalement ates
esprits familiers sera de leur commander de ne tedire jamais aucune
chose deuxmemes que lorsque tu les interrogeras amoins queles fut pour
tavertir des choses qui concerne ton utilite outon prejudice parceque situ
ne leur limite pas leparler ils tediront tant etdesi grandes choses quils
tofusquiront lentendement et tu ne scaurois aquoy tentenir desorte que
dans la confusion des choses ils pourroient te faire prevariquer ettefaire
tomber dans des erreurs irreparables ne te fais jamais prier en aucune
chose ou tu pourras aider et seccourir tonprochain et nattends pas quil
tele demande mais tache descavoir afond," etc.
This extract may be said to give a fair idea of the average quality of the
French. The style, however, of the first book is much more colloquial than
that of the second and third, it being especially addressed by Abraham to
Lamech, his son, and the second person singular being employed
throughout it. As some English readers may be ignorant of the fact, it is
perhaps as well here to remark that in French "tu," thou, is only used
between very intimate friends and relations, between husband and wife,
lovers, etc.; while "vous," you, is the more usual mode of address to the
world in general. Again, in sacred books, in prayers, etc., "vous" is used,
where we employ "thou" as having a more solemn sound than "tu". Hence
the French verb "tutoyer," = "to be very familiar with, to be on extremely

friendly terms with any one, and even to be insolently familiar". This first
book contains advice concerning magic, and a description of Abraham's
travels and experiences, as well as a mention of the many marvellous
works he had been able to accomplish by means of this system of Sacred
Magic. The second and third books (which really contain the magic of
Abra-Melin, and are practically based on the two MSS. entrusted by him
to Abraham, the Jew, but with additional comments by the latter) differ in
style from the former, the phraseology is quaint and at times vague, and
the second person plural, "vous," is employed for the most part instead of
"tu".
The work may then be thus roughly classified:
First book: = Advice and autobiography; both addressed by the

author to his son Lamech.
Second book: = General and complete description of the means of
obtaining the magical powers desired.
Third book: = The application of these powers to produce an
immense number of magical results.
Though the chapters of the second and third books have special
headings in the actual text, those of the first book have none; wherefore
in the "Table of Contents" I have supplemented this defect by a careful
analysis of their subject matter.
This system of Sacred Magic Abraham acknowledges to have received
from the mage Abra-Melin; and claims to have himself personally and
actually wrought most of the wonderful effects described in the third book,
and many others besides.
Who then was this Abraham the Jew? It is possible, though there is no
mention of this in the MS., that he was a descendant of that Abraham the
Jew who wrote the celebrated alchemical work on twenty-one pages of
bark or papyrus, which came into the hands of Nicholas Flamel, and by
whose study the latter is said eventually to have attained the possession
of the "stone of the wise". The only remains of the church of Saint
Jacques de la Boucherie which exists at the present day, is the tower,
which stands near the Place du Chtelet, about ten minutes' walk from
the Bibliothque de l'Arsenal; and there is yet a street near this tower
which bears the title of "Rue Nicolas Flamel," so that his memory still
survives in Paris, together with that of the church close to which he lived,
and to which, after the attainment of the Philosopher's Stone, he and his
wife Pernelle caused a handsome peristyle to be erected.
From his own account, the author of the present work appears to have
been born in A.D. 1362, and to have written this manuscript for his son,
Lamech, in 1458, being then in his ninety-sixth year. That is to say, that
he was the contemporary both of Nicholas Flamel and Pernelle, and also
of the mystical Christian Rosenkreutz, the founder of the celebrated
Rosicrucian Order or Fraternity in Europe. Like the latter, he appears to
have been very early seized with the desire of obtaining magical
knowledge; like him and Flamel, he left his home and travelled in search
of the initiated wisdom; like them both, he returned to become a worker of
wonders. At this period, it was almost universally believed that the secret
knowledge was only really obtainable by those who were willing to quit
their home and their country to undergo dangers and hardships in its
quest; and this idea even obtains to an extent in the present day. The life
of the late Madame Blavatsky is an example in point.
This period in which Abraham the Jew lived was one in which magic was
almost universally believed in, and in which its professors were held in
honour; Faust (who was probably also a contemporary of our author),
Cornelius Agrippa, Sir Michael Scott, and many others I could name, are
examples of this, not to mention the celebrated Dr. Dee in a later age.
The history of this latter sage, his association with Sir Edward Kelly, and
the part he took in the European politics of his time are too well known to
need description here.
That Abraham the Jew was not one whit behind any of these magicians in
political influence, is evident to any one who peruses this work. He stands
a dim and shadowy figure behind the tremendous complication of central
European upheaval at that terrible and instructive epoch; as adepts of his
type always appear and always have appeared upon the theatre of
history in great crises of nations. The age which could boast
simultaneously three rival claimants to the direction of two of the greatest
levers of the society of that era -- the Papacy and the Germanic Empire -when the jealousies of rival Bishoprics, the overthrow of dynasties, the
Roman Church shaken to her foundations, sounded in Europe the tocsin
of that fearful struggle which invariably precedes social reorganisation,
that wild whirlwind of national convulsion which engulfs in its vortex the
civilisation of a yesterday, but to prepare the reconstitution of a morrow.
The enormous historical importance of such men as our author is always

underrated, generally doubted; notwithstanding that like the writing on the
wall at Belshazzar's feast, their manifestation in the political and historical
arena is like the warning of a Mene, Mene Tekel, Upharsin, to a foolish
and undiscerning world.
The full and true history of any adept could only be written by himself, and
even then, if brought before the eyes of the world at large, how many
persons would lend credence to it? and even the short and incomplete
statement of the notable events of our author's life contained in the first
book, will be to most readers utterly incredible of belief. But what must
strike all alike is the tremendous faith of the man himself, as witnessed by
his many and dangerous journeyings for so many years through wild and
savage regions and places difficult of access even in our own day with all
the increased facilities of transit which we enjoy. This faith at length
brought him its reward; though only at the moment when even he was
becoming discouraged and sick at heart with disappointed hope. Like his
great namesake, the forefather of the Hebrew race, he had not in vain left
his home, his "Ur of the Chaldees," that he might at length discover that
light of initiated wisdom, for which his soul had cried aloud within him for
so many years. This culmination of his wanderings was his meeting with
Abra-Melin, the Egyptian mage. From him he received that system of
magical instruction and practice which forms the body of the second and
third books of this work.
In the manuscript original this name is spelt in several different ways, I
have noted this in the text wherever it occurs. The variations are: AbraMelin, Abramelin, Abramelim, and Abraha-Melin. From these I have
selected the orthography Abra-Melin to place on the title page, and I have
adhered to the same in this introduction.
As far as can be gathered from the text, the chief place of residence of
Abraham the Jew after his travels was Wrzburg, or, as it was called in
the Middle Ages, "Herbipolis". He appears to have married his cousin,
and by her to have had two sons, the elder, named Joseph, whom he
instructed in the mysteries of the holy Qabalah, and Lamech, the
younger, to whom he bequeaths this system of Sacred Magic as a legacy,
and to whom the whole of the first book is addressed. He speaks further
of three daughters, to each of whom he gave 100,000 golden florins as a
dowry.
10
He expressly states that he obtained both his wife, and a treasure of

3,000,000 golden florins, by means of some of the magical operations
described in the third book. He further admits that his first inclination to
Qabalistical and magical studies was owing to certain instructions in the
secrets of the Qabalah, which he received when young from his father,
Simon; so that after the death of the latter his most earnest desire was to
travel in search of an initiated master.
To the sincere and earnest student of occultism this work cannot fail to be
of value, whether as an encouragement to that most rare and necessary
quality, unshaken faith; as an aid to his discrimination between true and
false systems of magic; or as presenting an assemblage of directions for
the production of magical effects, which the author of the book affirms to
have tried with success.
Especially valuable are the remarks of Abraham the Jew on the various
professors of the "art which none may name" in the course of his
wanderings and travels; the account of the many wonders he worked;
and, above all, the careful classification of the magical experiments in the
third book, together with his observations and advice thereon.
Not least in interest are the many notable persons of that age for or
against whom he performed marvels: The Emperor Sigismund of
Germany: Count Frederic the Quarreller: the Bishop of his city (probably
either John I, who began the foundation of the Wrzburg University in
1403 with the authorisation of Pope Boniface IX, or else Echter von
Mespelbrunn, who completed the same noble work): the Count of
Warwick: Henry VI of England: the rival Popes -- John XXIII, Martin V,
Gregory XII, and Benedict XIII: the Council of Constance: the Duke of
Bavaria: Duke Leopold of Saxony: the Greek Emperor, Constantine
Palologos: and probably the Archbishop Albert of Magdeburg: and also
some of the Hussite Leaders -- a roll of names celebrated in the history of
that stirring time.
Considering the era in which our author lived, and the nation to which he
belonged, he appears to have been somewhat broad in his religious
views; for not only does he insist that this sacred system of magic may be
attained by any one, whether Jew, Christian, Mahometan, or pagan, but
he also continually warns Lamech against the error of changing the
religion in which one has been brought up; and he alleges this
circumstance as the reason of the occasional failures of the magician
11
Joseph of Paris (the only other person he mentions besides himself and
Abra-Melin who was acquainted with this particular system of magic),
namely that having been brought up a Christian, he had renounced that
faith and become a Jew. At first sight it does not seem clear from the
occult point of view what particular occult disadvantage should be
attached to such a line of action. But we must remember, that in his age,
the conversion to another religion invariably meant an absolute, solemn
and thorough renunciation and denial of any truth in the religion
previously professed by the convert. Herein would be the danger,
because whatever the errors, corruption, or mistakes in any particular
form of religion, all are based on and descended from the
acknowledgment of supreme divine powers. Therefore to deny any
religion (instead of only abjuring the mistaken or erroneous parts thereof)
would be equivalent to denying formally and ceremonially the truths on
which it was originally founded; so that whenever a person having once
done this should begin to practise the operations of the Sacred Magic, he
would find himself compelled to affirm with his whole will-force those very
formulas which he had at one time magically and ceremonially (though
ignorantly) denied; and whenever he attempted to do this, the occult Law
of Reaction would raise as a ceremonial obstacle against the effect which
he should wish to produce, the memory of that ceremonial denial which
his previous renunciation had firmly sealed in his atmosphere. And the
force of this would be in exact proportion to the manner and degree in
which he had renounced his former creed. For of all hindrances to
magical action, the very greatest and most fatal is unbelief, for it checks
and stops the action of the will.
Even in the commonest natural operations we see this. No child could
learn to walk, no student could assimilate the formulas of any science,
were the impracticability and impossibility of so doing the first thing in his
mind. Wherefore it is that all adepts and great teachers of religion and of
magic have invariably insisted on the necessity of faith.
But though apparently more broad in view in admitting the excellence of
every religion, unfortunately he shows the usual injustice to and jealousy
of women which has distinguished men for so many ages, and which as
far as I can see arises purely and simply from an innate consciousness
that were women once admitted to compete with them on any plane
without being handicapped as they have been for so many centuries, the
former would speedily prove their superiority, as the Amazons of old did;
which latter (as the writings even of their especial enemies, the Greeks,
12
unwillingly admit) when overcome, were conquered by superior numbers,

not by superior valour. However, Abraham the Jew grudgingly admits that
the Sacred Magic may be attained by a virgin, while at the same time
dissuading anyone from teaching it to her! The numerous advanced
female occult students of the present day are the best answer to this.
But notwithstanding the forementioned shortcomings, his advice on the
manner of using magical power, when acquired, to the honour of God, the
welfare and relief of our neighbour, and for the benefit of the whole
animate Creation, is worthy of the highest respect; and no one can
peruse it without feeling that his highest wish was to act up to his belief.
His counsel, however, of a retired life after attaining magical power by his
system (I do not speak of the retirement during the six months'
preparation for the same) is not borne out by his own account of his life,
wherein we find him so constantly involved in the contests and
convulsions of the time.
Also, however much the life of a hermit or anchorite may appear to be
advocated, we rarely, if ever, find it followed by those adepts whom I may
perhaps call the initiated and wonder-working medium between the great
concealed adepts and the outer world. An example of the former class we
may find in our author, an example of the latter in Abra-Melin.
The particular scheme or system of magic advocated in the present work
is to an extent "sui generis," but to an extent only. It is rather the manner
of its application which makes it unique. In magic, that is to say, the
science of the control of the secret forces of Nature, there have always
been two great schools, the one great in good, the other in evil; the
former the magic of light, the latter that of darkness; the former usually
depending on the knowledge and invocation of the angelic natures, the
latter on the method of evocation of the demonic races. Usually the
former is termed white magic, as opposed to the latter, or black magic.
The invocation of angelic forces, then, is an idea common in works of
magic, as also are the ceremonies of pact with and submission to the evil
spirits.
The system, however, taught in the present work is based on the
following conception:
That the good spirits and angelic powers of Light are superior in
power to the fallen spirits of Darkness.
13
That these latter as a punishment have been condemned to the

service of the initiates of the magic of Light. (This Idea is to be
found also in the Koran or, as it is frequently and perhaps more
correctly written, "Qr-an".)
As a consequence of this doctrine, all ordinary material effects and
phenomena are produced by the labour of the evil spirits under the
command usually of the good.
That consequently whenever the evil demons can escape from the
control of the good, there is no evil that they will not work by way of
vengeance.
That therefore sooner than obey man, they will try to make him
their servant, by inducing him to conclude pacts and agreements
with them.
That to further this project, they will use every means that offers to
obsess him.
That in order to become an adept, therefore, and dominate them;
the greatest possible firmness of will, parity of soul and intent, and
power of self-control is necessary.
That this is only to be attained by self-abnegation on every plane.
That man, therefore, is the middle nature, and natural controller of
the middle nature between the angels and the demons, and that
therefore to each man is attached naturally both a guardian angel
and a malevolent demon, and also certain spirits that may become
familiars, so that with him it rests to give the victory unto the which
he will.
That, therefore, in order to control and make service of the lower
and evil, the knowledge of the higher and good is requisite (i.e., in
the language of the Theosophy of the present day, the knowledge
of the higher self).
From this it results that the magnum opus propounded in this work is: by
purity and self-denial to obtain the knowledge of and conversation with
one's guardian angel, so that thereby and thereafter we may obtain the
right of using the evil spirits for our servants in all material matters.
This, then, is the system of the Secret Magic of Abra-Melin, the mage, as
taught by his disciple Abraham the Jew; and elaborated down to the
smallest points.
Except in the professed black magic Grimoires, the necessity of the
invocation of the divine and angelic forces to control the demons is
14
invariably insisted upon in the operations of evocation described and

taught in Mediaeval magical manuscripts and published works. So that it
is not so much, as I have before said, this circumstance, as the mode of
its development by the six Moons' preparation, which is unusual; while
again, the thorough and complete classification of the demons with their
offices, and of the effects to be produced by their services, is not to be
found elsewhere.
Apart from the interest attaching to the description of his travels, the
careful manner in which Abraham has made note of the various persons
he had met professing to be in the possession of magical powers, what
they really could do and could not do, and the reasons of the success or
failure of their experiments, has a particular value of its own.
The idea of the employment of a child as clairvoyant in the invocation of
the guardian angel is not unusual; for example, in the "Mendal," a style of
oriental divination familiar to all readers of Wilkie Collins' novel, The
Moonstone, ink is poured into the palm of a child's hand, who, after
certain mystical words being recited by the operator, beholds visions
clairvoyantly therein. The celebrated evocation at which the great
Mediaeval sculptor, Benvenuto Cellini, is said to have assisted, also was
in part worked by the aid of a child as seer. Cagliostro also is said to have
availed himself of the services of children in this particular. But for my part
I cannot understand the imperative necessity of the employment of a child
in the angelic evocation, if the operator be pure in mind, and has
developed the clairvoyant faculty which is latent in every human being,
and which is based on the utilisation of the thought-vision. This thoughtvision is exercised almost unconsciously by everyone in thinking of either
a place, person, or thing, which they know well; immediately, coincident
with the thought, the image springs before the mental sight; and it is but
the conscious and voluntary development of this which is the basis of
what is commonly called clairvoyance. Among the Highlanders of
Scotland, the faculty, as is well known, is of common manifestation; and
by the English it is usually spoken of as "second sight".
Unfortunately, like far too many modern occultists, Abraham the Jew
shows a marked intolerance of magical systems differing from his own;
even the renowned name of Petrus di Abano5 is not sufficient to save the
Heptameron or Magical Elements from condemnation in the concluding
part of the third book. Works on magic, written conjurations, pentacles,
seals, and symbols, the employment of magical circles, the use of any
15
language but one's mother tongue, appear at first sight to be damned

wholesale, though on a more careful examination of the text I think we
shall find that it is rather their abuse through ignorance of their meaning
which he intends to decry, than their intelligent and properly regulated
use.
It will be well here to carefully examine these points from the occult
standpoint of an initiate, and for the benefit of real students.
Abraham in several places insists that the basis of this system of Sacred
Magic is to be found in the Qabalah. Now, he expressly states that he has
instructed his eldest son, Joseph, herein as being his right by
primogeniture, even as he himself had received somewhat of Qabalistic
instruction from his father, Simon. But this system of magic he bequeaths
to his younger son, Lamech, expressly as a species of recompense to
himfor not being taught the Qabalah, his status as a younger son being
apparently a serious traditional disqualification. This being so, the reason
is evident why he warns Lamech against the use of certain seals,
pentacles, incomprehensible words, etc.; because most of these being
based on the secrets of the Qabalah, their use by a person ignorant
hereof might be excessively dangerous through the not only possible but
probable perversion of the secret formulas therein contained. Any
advanced student of occultism who is conversant with Mediaeval works
on magic, whether MS. or printed, knows the enormous and incredible
number of errors in the sigils, pentacles, and Hebrew or Chaldee names,
which have arisen from ignorant transcription and reproduction; this being
carried to such an extent that in some cases the use of the distorted
formulas given would actually have the effect of producing the very
opposite result to that expected from them.
Wherefore Abraham the Jew it appears to me, in his anxiety to save his
son from dangerous errors in magical working, has preferred to
endeavour to fill him with contempt for any other systems and methods of
operation than the one here laid down. For also besides the unintentional
perversions of magical symbols I have above mentioned, there was
further the circumstance not only possible but probable of the many black
magic grimoires falling into his hands, as they evidently had into
Abraham's, the symbols in which are in many cases intentional
perversions of Divine Names and seals, so as to attract the evil spirits
and repel the good.
16
For the third book of this work is crowded with Qabalistic squares of
letters, which are simply so many pentacles, and in which the names
employed are the very factors which make them of value. Among them
we find a form of the celebrated Sator, Arepo, Tenet, Opera, Rotas, which
is one of the pentacles in the Key of Solomon. Abraham's formula is
slightly different:
and is to be used for obtaining the love of a maiden.

The pentacle in my Key of Solomon is classed under Saturn, while the
above is applied to the nature of Venus. I give the Hebrew form (see
Appendix A, Table of Hebrew and Chaldee Letters) of equivalents:--
17
Or in Latin letters:
In the Key of Solomon it is (as being a pentacle) inscribed within a double

circle, wherein is written the following versicle from Psalm lxxii, v. 8 "His
dominion shall be also from the one sea unto the other, and from the
flood unto the world's end". In the Hebrew, this versicle consists of exactly
twenty-five letters, the number of the letters of the square. It will be at
once noticed that both this form and that given by Abraham the Jew are
perfect examples of double acrostics, that is, that they read in every
direction, whether horizontal or perpendicular, whether backwards or
forwards. But the form given as a pentacle in the Key of Solomon the
King is there said to be of value in adversity, and for repressing the pride
of the spirits.
This example therefore shows clearly that it is not so much the use of
symbolic pentacles that Abraham is opposed to, as their ignorant
perversions and inappropriate use.
It is also to be observed, that while many of the symbolic squares of
letters of the third book present the nature of the double acrostic, there
are also many which do not, and in the case of a great number the letters
do not fill up the square entirely, but are arranged somewhat in the form
of a gnomon, etc. Others again leave the centre part of the square blank.
In Appendix C to the Introduction I will, for the sake of comparison, give
some examples of angelic invocation taken from other sources.
Abraham the Jew repeatedly admits, as I have before urged, that this
particular system of the Sacred Magic of Abra-Melin has its basis in the
18
Qabalah. It is well to examine what is here meant. The Qabalah itself is

divided into many parts; the great bulk of it is of a mystic doctrinal nature,
giving the inner occult meaning of the Jewish sacred writings. Also it
employs the numerical values of the Hebrew letters, to draw analogies
between words, the total numerical value of whose letters is the same;
this branch alone is a most complicated study, and it will be foreign to our
purpose to go into it here; the more so as my work, the Kabbalah
Unveiled, treats at length of all these points. The so-called practical
Qabalah is the application of the mystic teachings to the production of
magical effects. For the classification of divine and angelic names; of
hosts and orders of angels, spirits, and demons; of particular names of
archangels, angels, intelligences, and demons, is to be found carried out
even to minute detail in the Qabalah, so that the knowledge hereof can
give a critical appreciation of the correspondences, sympathies, and
antipathies obtaining in the invisible world. Therefore what Abraham
means is, that this system of Sacred Magic is thoroughly reliable,
because correct in all its attributions, and that this being so, there is no
chance of the operator using names and formulas on wrong occasions
and in error.
But also it is notable that Abraham the Jew (probably again with the intent
of confusing Lamech as little as possible) speaks only of two great
classes of spirits: the angels and the devils; the former to control, the
latter to be controlled; and leaves entirely out of consideration, or rather
does not describe that vast race of beings, the elemental spirits, who in
themselves comprise an infinitude of various divisions of classification,
some of these being good, some evil, and a great proportion neither the
one nor the other. Evidently, also, many of the results proposed to be
attained in the third book, would imply the use of the elemental spirits
rather than that of the demons. No advanced adept, such as Abraham
evidently was, could possibly be ignorant of their existence, power, and
value; and we are therefore forced to conclude either that he was
unwilling to reveal this knowledge to Lamech; or, which is infinitely more
probable, that he feared to confuse him by the large amount of additional
instruction which would be necessary to make him thoroughly understand
their classification, nature, and offices. This latter line of action would be
the less imperative as the correctness of the symbols of the third book
would minimize chances of error; and what Abraham is undertaking to
teach Lamech, is how to arrive at practical magical results; rather than the
secret wisdom of the Qabalah.
19
It is entirely beyond the scope of this introduction for me to give here any
lengthy dissertation on the natures, good or evil, of spiritual beings. I will,
therefore, only state briefly and concisely the principal differences
between angels, elementals, and devils.
We may then conclude that angels, though themselves divided into
numerous orders and classes, possess generally the following
characteristics: That they are entirely good in nature and operation, the
conscient administrators of the divine will upon the plane of the material
universe; that they are responsible, not irresponsible agents, and
therefore capable of fall; and that they are independent of the currents of
the infinite secret forces of Nature, and can therefore act beyond them,
though their classification and qualities will cause them to be more
sympathetic with certain among these forces than with the rest, and this
in varying degree. Also that they are superior in power to men, spirits,
elementals, and devils.
The elementals on the other hand, though consisting of an infinitude of
classes, are the forces of the elements of nature, the administrators of the
currents thereof; and can therefore never act beyond and independently
of their own particular currents. In a sense, therefore, they are
irresponsible for the action of a current as a whole, though responsible for
the part thereof in which they immediately act. Therefore also they are at
the same time subject to the general current of the force, wherein they
live, move, and have their being; though superior to the immediate and
particular part of it which they direct. Such races, superior to man in
intuition, and magical powers; inferior to him in other ways; superior to
him in their power in a particular current of an element; inferior to him in
only partaking of the nature of that one element; are of necessity to be
found constantly recurring in all the mythologies of antiquity. The dwarfs
and elves of the Scandinavians; the nymphs, hamadryads, and nature
spirits of the Greeks; the fairies good and bad of the legends dear to our
childish days; the host of mermaids, satyrs, fauns, sylphs, and fays; the
forces intended to be attracted and propitiated by the fetishes of the
Negro race; are for the most part no other thing than the ill-understood
manifestations of this great class, the elementals. Among these, some, as
I have before observed, are good; such are the salamanders, undines,
sylphs, and gnomes, of the Rosicrucian philosophy; many are frightfully
malignant, delighting in every kind of evil, and might easily be mistaken
for devils by the uninitiated, save that their power is less; a great
proportion are neither good nor evil, irrationally working either; just as a
20
monkey or a parrot might act; in fact such closely resemble animals in

their nature, and especially combinations of animals, in which forms
distorted and mingled, would lie their symbolic manifestation. Another
very large class, would not act irrationally in this manner; but with intent,
only always following the predominant force either good or evil in their
then entourage; a spirit of this kind, for example, attracted into an
assembly of good persons would endeavour to excite their ideas towards
good; attracted among evilminded persons would incite them mentally to
crime. Among how many criminals is not their only excuse that "they
thought they kept hearing something telling them to commit the crime"!
Yet these suggestions would not always arise from elementals alone, but
frequently from the depraved astral remnants of deceased evil persons.
Devils, on the other hand, are far more powerful than elementals, but their
action for evil is parallel to that of the good angels for good; and their
malignancy is far more terrible than that of the evil elementals, for not
being, like them, subjected to the limits of a certain current, their sphere
of operation extends over a far greater area; while the evil they commit is
never irrational or mechanical, but worked with full consciousness and
intent.
I do not agree entirely with the manner of behaviour, advised by Abraham
towards the spirits; on the contrary, the true initiates have always
maintained that the very greatest courtesy should be manifested by the
exorciser, and that it is only when they are obstinate and recalcitrant that
severer measures should be resorted to; and that even with the devils we
should not reproach them for their condition; seeing that a contrary line of
action is certain to lead the magician into error. But, perhaps, Abraham
has rather intended to warn Lamech against the danger of yielding to
them in an exorcism even in the slightest degree.
The word "demon" is evidently employed in this work almost as a
synonym of devil; but, as most educated people are aware, it is derived
from the Greek "daimon," which anciently simply meant any spirit, good or
bad.
A work filled with suggestive magical references is the well-known
Arabian Nights, and it is interesting to notice the number of directions in
the third book of this work for producing similar effects to those there
celebrated.
21
For example, the ninth chapter of the third book gives the symbols to be
employed for changing human beings into animals, one of the
commonest incidents in the Arabian Nights, as in the story of the "first old
man and the ind," that of the "three calendars and the five ladies of
Bagdad," that of "Beder and Giauhare," etc., etc.; as distinct from the
voluntary transformation of the magician into another form, as exemplified
in the "story of the second calendar.
Again these chapters will recall to many of my readers the extraordinary
magical effects which Faust is said to have produced; who, by the way,
as I have before remarked, was in all probability contemporary with
Abraham the Jew.
But the mode of their production as given in this work is not the black
magic of pact and devil worship, against which our author so constantly
inveighs, but instead a system of Qabalistic magic, similar to that of the
Key of Solomon the King and the Clavicles of Rabbi Solomon, though
differing in the circumstance of the prior invocation of the guardian angel
once for all, while in the works I have just mentioned the angels are
invoked in each evocation by means of the magical circle. Such works as
these, then, and their like, it could not be the intention of Abraham to
decry, seeing that like his system they are founded on the secret
knowledge of the Qabalah; as this in its turn was derived from that mighty
scheme of ancient wisdom, the initiated magic of Egypt. For to any deep
student at the same time of the Qabalah and of modern Egyptology, the
root and origin of the former is evidently to be sought in that country of
mysteries, the home of the gods whose symbols and classification formed
so conspicuous a part of the sacred rites; and from which even to the
present day, so many recipes of magic have descended. For we must
make a very careful distinction between the really ancient Egyptian
magic, and the Arabian ideas and traditions prevailing in Egypt in recent
times. I think it is the learned Lenormant who points out in his work on
Chaldean magic, that the great difference between this and the Egyptian
was that the magician of the former school indeed invoked the spirits, but
that the latter allied himself with and took upon himself the characters and
names of the gods to command the spirits by, in his exorcism; which latter
mode of working would not only imply on his part a critical knowledge of
the nature and power of the gods; but also the affirmation of his reliance
upon them, and his appeal to them for aid to control the forces evoked; in
other words, the most profound system of white magic which it is possible
to conceive.
22
The next point worthy of notice is what Abraham urges regarding the
preferability of employing one's mother tongue both in prayer and
evocation; his chief reason being the absolute necessity of
comprehending utterly and thoroughly with the whole soul and heart, that
which the lips are formulating. While fully admitting the necessity of this, I
yet wish to state some reasons in favour of the employment of a language
other than one's own. Chief, and first, that it aids the mind to conceive the
higher aspect of the operation; when a different language and one looked
upon as sacred is employed, and the phrases in which do not therefore
suggest matters of ordinary life. Next, that Hebrew, Chaldee, Egyptian,
Greek, Latin, etc., if properly pronounced are more sonorous in vibration
than most modern languages, and from that circumstance can suggest
greater solemnity. Also that the farther a magical operation is removed
from the commonplace, the better. But I perfectly agree with Abraham,
that it is before all things imperative that the operator should thoroughly
comprehend the import of his prayer or conjuration. Furthermore the
words in these ancient languages imply "formulas of correspondences"
with more ease than those of the modern ones.
Pentacles and symbols are valuable as an equilibrated and fitting basis
for the reception of magical force; but unless the operator can really
attract that force to them, they are nothing but so many dead, and to him
worthless, diagrams. But used by the initiate who fully comprehends their
meaning, they become to him a powerful protection and aid, seconding
and focussing the workings of his will.
At the risk of repeating what I have elsewhere said, I must caution the
occult student against forming a mistaken judgment from what Abraham
the Jew says regarding the use of magic circles and of licensing the
spirits to depart. It is true that in the convocation of the spirits as laid
down by him, it is not necessary to form a magic circle for defence and
protection; but why? -- Because the whole group of the bedchamber,
oratory, and terrace are consecrated by the preparatory ceremonies of
the previous six Moons; so that the whole place is protected, and the
magician is, as it were, residing constantly within a magic circle.
Therefore also the licensing to depart may be to a great extent dispensed
with because the spirits cannot break into the consecrated limit of the
periphery of the walls of the house. But let the worker of ordinary
evocations be assured that were this not so, and the convocation was
performed in an unconsecrated place, without any magical circle having
been traced for defence, the invocation to visible appearance of such
23
fearful potencies as Amaymon, Egyn, and Beelzebub, would probably

result in the death of the exorcist on the spot; such death presenting the
symptoms of one arising from epilepsy, apoplexy, or strangulation,
varying with the conditions obtaining at the time. Also the circle having
been once formed, let the evocator guard carefully against either passing,
or stooping, or leaning beyond, its limits during the progress of the
exorcism, before the license to depart has been given. Because that,
even apart from other causes, the whole object and effect of the circle
working, is to create abnormal atmospheric conditions, by exciting a
different status of force within the circle to that which exists without it; so
that even without any malignant occult action of the spirits, the sudden
and unprepared change of atmosphere will seriously affect the exorciser
in the intensely strained state of nervous tension he will then be in. Also
the license to depart should not be omitted, because the evil forces will be
only too glad to revenge themselves on the operator for having disturbed
them, should he incautiously quit the circle without having previously sent
them away, and if necessary even forced them to go by contrary
conjurations.
I do not share Abraham's opinion as to the necessity of withholding the
operation of this Sacred Magic from a prince or potentate. Every great
system of occultism has its own occult guards, who will know how to
avenge mistaken tampering therewith.
At the risk of repeating myself I will once more earnestly caution the
student against the dangerous automatic nature of certain of the magical
squares of the third book; for, if left carelessly about, they are very liable
to obsess sensitive persons, children, or even animals.
Abraham's remarks concerning the errors of astrology in the common
sense, and of the attribution of the planetary hours are worthy of careful
note. Yet I have found the ordinary attribution of the planetary hours
effective to an extent.
In all cases where there is anything difficult or obscure in the text, I have
added copious explanatory notes; so many indeed as to form a species of
commentary in parts. Especially have those on the names of the spirits
cost me incredible labour, from the difficulty of identifying their root-forms.
The same may be said of those on the symbols of the third book.
Wherever I have employed parentheses in the actual text, they shew
certain words or phrases supplied to make the meaning clearer.
24
In conclusion I will only say that I have written this explanatory

introduction purely and solely as a help to genuine occult students; and
that for the opinion of the ordinary literary critic who neither understands
nor believes in occultism, I care nothing.
87 Rue Mozart, Auteuil, Paris.
25
26
Appendix A Hebrew Alphabet
APPENDIX B.
Employment of a child-clairvoyant by Cagliostro.

The well-known Joseph Balsamo, Count Cagliostro, is said to have been
born at Palermo in 1743. On his trial at Rome in 1790, and at Zurich in
1791, he was accused of "having practised all kinds of impositions; of
gold making, and of possessing the secret of prolonging life; of teaching
Cabalistic arts; of summoning and exorcising spirits; of having actually
foretold future things especially in small and secret assemblies, and
chiefly by means of a little boy whom he took aside with him into a
separate room, in order to fit him for divining."
With regard to the manner in which he employed this child clairvoyant, the
documents of the trial give the following information: "This child had to
kneel before a small table, on which a vessel of water and some lighted
candles were placed. He then instructed the boy to look into the vessel of
water, and so commenced his conjurations; he next laid his hand on the
head of the child, and in this position addressed a prayer to God for a
successful issue of the experiment. The child now became clairvoyant,
and said at first that he saw something white; then that he saw visions, an
angel, etc."
Again the documents say, "That he worked through the usual
ceremonies, and that all was wonderfully corroborated through the
appearance of the angel".
Cagliostro is also said at Milan to have availed himself of the services of
an orphan maiden of marriageable age as clairvoyant.
It will be remarked that this modus operandi differs strongly from that
employed by the mesmerists and hypnotists of today with their
clairvoyants. For here the whole force of the operator was concentrated
on a magical ritual of evocation, the hand being merely laid on the child's
head to form a link; and it in no way appears that the child was reduced to
the miserable condition of automatic trance now practised, and which a
really advanced occultist would be the first to condemn, as knowing its
dangers.
On the other hand, there seems to be a distinct similarity between
Cagliostro's method, and the system of oriental divination called the
Mendal, to which I have previously referred.
APPENDIX C.
Examples of other methods of angelic evocation.
For the benefit of the occult student I here give two other systems of
angelic evocation. The first is taken from that part of the book called
Barrett's Magus (1801), which is entitled "the Key to Ceremonial Magic".
The second is copied from my Key of Solomon the King
From
The Perfection and Key of . . . Ceremonial Magic
being the second part of the second book of
The Magus or Celestial Intelligencer;
by Francis Barrett, F. R. C.
"The good spirits may be invocated of us, or by us, divers ways, and they
in sundry shapes and manners offer themselves to us, for they openly
speak to those that watch, and do offer themselves to our sight, or do
inform us by dreams and by oracle of those things which we have a great
desire to know. Whoever therefore would call any good spirit to speak or
appear in sight, he must particularly observe two things; one whereof is
about the disposition of the invocant, the other concerning those things
which are outwardly to be adhibited to the invocation for the conformity of
the spirit to be called.
"It is necessary therefore that the invocant religiously dispose himself for
the space of many days to such a mystery, and to conserve himself
during the time chaste, abstinent, and to abstract himself as much as he
can from all manner of foreign and secular business; likewise he should
observe fasting, as much as shall seem convenient to him, and let him
daily, between sun rising and setting, being clothed in pure white linen,
seven times call upon God, and make a deprecation unto the angels to be
called and invocated, according to the rule which we have before taught.
Now the number of days of fasting and preparation is commonly one
month, i.e., the time of a whole lunation. Now, in the Cabala, we generally
prepare ourselves forty days before.
"Now concerning the place, it must be chosen clean, pure, close, quiet,
free from all manner of noise, and not subject to any stranger's sight. This
place must first of all be exorcised and consecrated; and let there be a
29
table or altar placed therein, covered with a clean white linen cloth, and
set towards the east: and on each side thereof place two consecrated
wax-lights burning, the flame thereof ought not to go out all these days. In
the middle of the altar let there be placed lamens, or the holy paper we
have before described, covered with fine linen, which is not to be opened
until the end of the days of consecration. You shall also have in readiness
a precious perfume and a pure anointing oil. And let them both be kept
consecrated. Then set a censer on the head of the altar, wherein you
shall kindle the holy fire, and make a precious perfume every day that you
pray.
"Now for your habit, you shall have a long garment of white linen, close
before and behind, which may come down quite over the feet, and gird
yourself about the loins with a girdle. You shall likewise have a veil made
of pure white linen on which must be wrote in a gilt lamen, the name
Tetragrammaton; all which things are to be consecrated and sanctified in
order. But you must not go into this holy place till it be first washed and
covered with a cloth new and clean, and then you may enter, but with
your feet naked and bare; and when you enter therein you shall sprinkle
with holy water, then make a perfume upon the altar; and then on your
knees pray before the altar as we have directed.
"Now when the time is expired, on the last day, you shall fast more
strictly; and fasting on the day following, at the rising of the Sun, enter the
holy place, using the ceremonies before spoken of, first by sprinkling
thyself, then, making a perfume, you shall sign the cross with holy oil on
the forehead, and anoint your eyes, using prayer in all these
consecrations.
Then open the lamen and pray before the altar upon your knees; and
then an invocation may be made as follows:-AN INVOCATION OF THE GOOD SPIRITS.
"In the name of the blessed and holy Trinity, I do desire ye, strong and
mighty angels (here name the spirit or spirits you would haveappear), that
if it be the divine will of him who is called Tetragrammaton, etc., the holy
God, the Father, that ye take upon ye some shape as best becometh your
celestial nature, and appear to us visibly here in this place, and answer
our demands,in as far as we shall not transgress the bounds of the divine
mercy and goodness, by requesting unlawful knowledge; but that thou wilt
30
graciously shew us what things are most profitable for us to know and do,
to the glory and honour of his divine majesty who liveth and reigneth
world without end. Amen.
"Lord, thy will be done on earth as it is in heaven - make clean
our hearts within us, and take not thy Holy Spirit from us. O Lord,
by thy name we have called them, suffer them to administer unto
us.
"And that all things may work together for thy honour and glory, to
whom with thee, the Son and Blessed Spirit, be ascribed all might,
majesty, and dominion, world without end. Amen.
"The invocation being made, the good angels will appear unto you which
you desire, which you shall entertain with a chaste communication, and
licence them to depart.
"Now the lamen which is used to invoke any good spirit must be made
after the following manner: either in metal conformable or in new wax
mixed with convenient spices and colours; or it may be made with pure
white paper with convenient colours, and the outward form of it may be
either square, circular, or triangular, or of the like sort, according to the
rule of the numbers; in which there must be written the divine names, as
well general as special. And in the centre of the lamen draw a hexagon7
or character of six corners; in the middle thereof write the name and
character of the star, or of the spirit his governor, to whom the good spirit
that is to be called is subject. And about this character let there be placed
so many characters of five corners, or pentacles, as the spirits we would
call together at once. But if we should call only one, nevertheless there
must be made four pentagons, wherein the name of the spirit or spirits
with their characters are to be written. Now this lamen ought to be
composed when the Moon is in her increase, on those days and hours
which agree to the spirit; and if we take a fortunate planet therewith, it will
be the better for the producing the effect; which table or lamen being
rightly made in the manner we have fully described, must be consecrated
according to the rules above delivered.
"We will yet declare unto you another rite more easy to perform this thing:
Let the man who wishes to receive an oracle from a spirit, be chaste,
pure, and sanctified; then a place being chosen pure, clean, and covered
everywhere with clean and white linen, on the Lord's day in the new of the
31
Moon, let him enter into that place clothed with white linen; let him
exorcise the place, bless it, and make a circle therein with a consecrated
coal; let there be written in the outer part of the circle the names of the
angels; in the inner part thereof write the mighty names of God; and let be
placed within the circle, at the four parts of the World, the vessels for the
perfumes. Then being washed and fasting, let him enter the place, and
pray towards the East this whole Psalm: "Blessed are the undefiled in
the way, etc.".
Then make a fumigation, and deprecate the angels by the said divine
names, that they will appear unto you, and reveal or discover that which
you so earnestly desire; and do this continually for six days washed, and
fasting. On the seventh day being washed and fasting, enter the circle,
perfume it, and anoint thyself with holy oil upon the forehead, eyes, and in
the palms of both hands, and upon the feet; then with bended knees, say
the Psalm aforesaid, with divine and angelical names. Which being said,
arise, and walk round the circle from east to west, until thou shalt be
wearied with a giddiness of thy head and brain, then straightway fall down
in the circle, where thou mayest rest, and thou wilt be wrapped up in an
ecstasy; and a spirit will appear and inform thee of all things necessary to
be known. We must observe also, that in the circle there ought to be four
holy candles burning at the four parts of the World, which ought not to
want light for the space of a week.
"And the manner of fasting is this: to abstain from all things having a life
of sense, and from those which do proceed from them, let him drink only
pure running water; neither is there any food or wine to be taken till the
going down of the Sun.
"Let the perfume and the holy anointing oil be made as is set forth in
Exodus, and other holy books of the Bible. It is also to be observed, that
as often as he enters the circle he has upon his forehead a golden lamen,
upon which must be written the name Tetragrammaton, in the manner we
have before mentioned."
In The Key of Solomon the King will be found other directions for invoking
spirits as follows:"Make a small book containing the prayers for all the operations, the
names of the angels in the form of litanies, their seals and characters; the
32
which being done thou shalt consecrate the same unto God and unto the
pure spirits in the manner following:"Thou shalt set in the destined place a small table covered with a white
cloth, whereon thou shalt lay the book opened at the Great Pentacle
which should be drawn on the first leaf of the said book; and having
kindled a lamp which should be suspended above the centre of the table,
thou shalt surround the said table with a white curtain; clothe thyself in the
proper vestments, and holding the book open, repeat upon thy knees the
following prayer with great humility:THE PRAYER.
"Adonai, Elohim, El, Eheieh Asher Eheieh, Prince of Princes,
Existence of Existences, have mercy upon me, and cast thine
eyes upon thy servant (N.) who invoketh thee most devoutly, and
supplicateth thee by thy holy and tremendous name,
Tetragrammaton, to be propitious and to order thine angels and
spirits to come and take up their abode in this place; O ye angels
and spirits of the stars, O all ye angels and elementary spirits, O
all ye spirits present before the face of God, I the minister and
faithful servant of the most high conjure ye, let God himself, the
Existence of Existences, conjure ye to come and be present at
this operation; I the servant of God, most humbly entreat ye.
Amen.
"After which thou shalt incense it with the incense proper to the planet
and the day, and thou shalt replace the book on the aforesaid table,
taking heed that the fire of the lamp be kept up continually during the
operation, and keeping the curtains closed. Repeat the same ceremony
for seven days, beginning with Saturday, and perfuming the book each
day with the incense proper to the planet ruling the day and hour, and
taking heed that the lamp shall burn both day and night; after the which
thou shalt shut up the book in a small drawer under the table, made
expressly for it, until thou shalt have occasion to use it; and every time
that thou wishest to use it, clothe thyself with thy vestments, kindle the
lamp, and repeat upon thy knees the aforesaid prayer, 'Adonai, Elohim,'
etc.
33
"It is necessary also in the consecration of the book, to summon all the
angels whose names are written therein in the form of litanies, the which
thou shalt do with devotion; and even if the angels and spirits appear not
in the consecration of the book, be not thou astonished thereat, seeing
that they are of a pure nature, and consequently have much difficulty in
familiarising themselves with men who are inconstant and impure, but the
ceremonies and characters being correctly carried out, devoutly, and with
perseverance, they will be constrained to come, and it will at length
happen that at thy first invocation thou wilt be able to see and
communicate with them. But I advise thee to undertake nothing unclean
or impure, for then thy importunity, far from attracting them will only serve
to chase them from thee; and it will be thereafter exceedingly difficult for
thee to attract them for use for pure ends."
34
THE FIRST BOOK

OF THE
HOLY MAGIC
WHICH GOD GAVE UNTO MOSES, AARON, DAVID,
SOLOMON, AND OTHER
SAINTS, PATRIARCHS, AND PROPHETS; WHICH TEACHETH
THE TRUE DIVINE WISDOM.
BEQUEATHED BY ABRAHAM UNTO LAMECH HIS SON.

TRANSLATED FROM THE HEBREW.
1458.
35
THE FIRST BOOK OF THE HOLY MAGIC.

Although this first book serveth rather for prologue than for the actual
rules to acquire this divine and Sacred Magic; nevertheless, O! Lamech,
my son, thou wilt therein find certain examples and other matters which
will benonetheless useful and profitable unto thee than the precepts and
dogmas which I shall give thee in the second and third books. Wherefore
thou shalt not neglect the study of this first book, which shall serve thee
for an introduction unto the veritable and Sacred Magic, and unto the
practice of that which I, Abraham, the son of Simon, have learned, in part
from my father, and in part also from other wise and faithful men, and
which I have found true and real, having submitted it unto proof and
experiment. And having written this with mine own hand, I have placed it
within this casket, and locked it up, as a most precious treasure; in order
that when thou hast arrived at a proper age thou mayest be able to
admire, to consider, and to enjoy the marvels of the Lord; as well as thine
elder brother Joseph, who, as the first-born, hath received from me the
holy tradition of the Qabalah.
36
THE FIRST CHAPTER

Lamech, if thou wishest to know the reason wherefore I give unto thee
this book, it is that if thou considerest thy condition, which is that of being
alast-born son, thou shalt know wherefore it appertaineth unto thee; and I
should commit a great error should I deprive thee of that grace which God
hath given unto me with so much profusion and liberality. I will then make
every effort to avoid and to fly prolixity of words in this first book; having
alone in view the ancientness of this venerable and indubitable science.
And seeing that truth hath no need of enlightenment and of exposition,
she being simple and right; be thou only obedient unto all that I shall say
unto thee, contenting thyself with the simplicity thereof, be thou good and
upright,1 and thou shalt acquire more wealth than I could know how to
promise unto thee. May the Only and Most Holy God grant unto all, the
grace necessary to be able to comprehend and penetrate the high
mysteries of the Qabalah and of the Law; but they should content
themselves with that which the Lord accordeth unto them; seeing that if
against his divine will they wish to fly yet higher, even as did Lucifer, this
will but procure for them a most shameful and fatal fall. Wherefore it is
necessary to be extremely prudent, and to consider the intention which I
have had in describing this method of operation; because in consideration
of thy great youth I attempt no other thing but to excite thee unto the
research of this Sacred Magic. But the manner of acquiring the same will
come later, in all its perfection, and in its proper time; for it will be taught
thee by better masters than I, that is to say, by those same holy angels of
God. No man is born into the world a master, and for that reason are we
obliged to learn. He who applieth himself thereunto, and studieth,
learneth; and a man can have no more shameful and evil title2 than that of
being an ignorant person.
37
THE SECOND CHAPTER

Therfore do I confess, that I, even I also, am not born a master; neither
have I invented this science of my own proper genius; but I have learned
it from others in the manner which I will hereafter tell thee, and in truth.
My father, Simon, shortly before his death, gave me certain signs and
instructions concerning the way in which it is necessary to acquire the
holy Qabalah; but it is however true that he did not enter into the holy
mystery by the true path, and I could not know how to understand the
same sufficiently and perfectly as reason demanded. My father was
always contented and satisfied with such a method of understanding the
same, and he sought out no further the veritable science and magical art,
which I undertake to teach thee and to expound unto thee.
After his death, finding myself twenty years of age, I had a very great
passion to understand the true mysteries of the Lord; but of mine own
strength I could not arrive at the end which I intended to attain.
I learned that at Mayence there was a Rabbi who was a notable sage,
and the report went that he possessed in full the divine wisdom. The great
desire which I had to study induced me to go to seek him in order to learn
from him. But this man also had not received from the Lord the gift, and a
perfect grace; because, although he forced himself to manifest unto me
certain deep mysteries of the holy Qabalah, he by no means arrived at
the goal; and in his magic he did not in any way make use of the wisdom
of the Lord, but instead availed himself of certain arts and superstitions of
infidel and idolatrous nations, in part derived from the Egyptians, together
with images of the Medes and of the Persians, with herbs of the Arabians,
together with the power of the stars and constellations; and, finally, he
had drawn from every people and nation, and even from the Christians,
some diabolical art. And in everything the spirits blinded him to such an
extent, even while obeying him in some ridiculous and inconsequent
matter, that he actually believed that his blindness and error were the
veritable magic, and he therefore pushed no further his research into the
true and Sacred Magic. I also learned his extravagant experiments, and
for ten years did I remain buried in so great an error, until that after the
ten years I arrived in Egypt at the house of an ancient sage who was
called Abramelim, who put me into the true path as I will declare it unto
thee hereafter, and he gave me better instruction and doctrine than all the
others; but this particular grace was granted me by the almighty Father of
all mercy, that is to say, almighty God, who little by little illuminated mine
38
understanding and opened mine eyes to see and admire, to contemplate,

and search out his divine wisdom, in such a manner that it became
possible unto me to further and further understand and comprehend the
sacred mystery by which I entered into the knowledge of the holy angels,
enjoying their sight and their sacred conversation, from whom at length I
received afterwards the foundation of the Veritable Magic, and how to
command and dominate the evil spirits. So that by way of conclusion unto
this chapter I cannot say that I have otherwise received the true
instruction save from Abramelim and the true and incorruptible magic
save from the holy angels of God.
39
THE THIRD CHAPTER

I have already said in the preceding chapter that shortly after the death of
my father, I attached myself unto the research of the true wisdom, and of
the mystery of the Lord. Now in this chapter I will briefly mention the
places and countries by which I have passed in order to endeavour to
learn those things which are good. And I do this in order that it may serve
thee for a rule and example not to waste thy youth in petty and useless
pursuits, like little girls sitting round the fireplace. For there is nothing
more deplorable and more unworthy in a man than to find himself
ignorant in all circumstances.
He who worketh and travelleth learneth much; and he who knoweth not
how to conduct and govern himself when far from his native land, will
know still less in his own house how to do so. I dwelt then, after the death
of my father, for four years with my brothers and sisters, and I studied
with care how to put to a profitable use what my father had left me after
his death; and seeing that my means were insufficient to counterbalance
the expenses which I was compelled to be at, after having set in order all
my affairs and business as well as my strength permitted; I set out, and I
went into Vormatia to Mayence, in order to find there a very aged Rabbi
named Moses, in the hope that I had found in him that which I sought.
As I have said in the preceding chapter, his science had no foundation
such as that of the true divine wisdom. I remained with him for four years,
miserably wasting all that time there, and persuading myself that I had
learned all that I wished to know, and I was only thinking of returning to
my paternal home, when I casually met a young man of our sect, named
Samuel, a native of Bohemia, whose manners and mode of life showed
me that he wished to live, walk, and die in the way of the Lord and in his
holy Law; and I contracted so strong a bond of friendship with him that I
showed him all my feelings and intentions. As he had resolved to make a
journey to Constantinople, in order to there join a brother of his father,
and thence to pass into the Holy Land wherein our forefathers had dwelt,
and from the which for our very great errors and misdeeds we had been
chased and cast forth by God. He having so willed it, the moment that he
had made me acquainted with his design, I felt an extraordinary desire to
accompany him in his journey, and I believe that almighty God wished by
this means to awaken me, for I could take no rest until the moment that
we mutually and reciprocally passed our word to each other and swore to
make the voyage together.
40
On the 13th day of February, in the year 1397, we commenced our

journey, passing through Germany, Bohemia, Austria, and thence by
Hungary and Greece unto Constantinople, where we remained two years,
and I should never have quitted it, had not death taken Samuel from me
at length through a sudden illness.
Finding myself alone, a fresh desire for travel seized me, and so much
was my heart given thereto, that I kept wandering from one place to
another, until at length I arrived in Egypt, where constantly travelling for
the space of four years in one direction and another, the more I practised
the experiments of the magic of Rabbin Moses, the less did it please me.
I pursued my voyage towards our ancient country, where I fixed my
residence for a year, and neither saw nor heard of any other thing but
misery, calamity, and unhappiness.
After this period of time, I there found a Christian who also was travelling
in order to find that which I was seeking also myself. Having made an
agreement together, we resolved to go into the desert parts of Arabia for
the search for that which we ardently desired; feeling sure that, as we had
been told, there were in those places many just and very learned men,
who dwelt there in order to be able to study without any hindrance, and to
devote themselves unto that art for which we ourselves were seeking; but
as we there found nothing equivalent to the trouble we had taken, or
which was worthy of our attention, there came into my head the
extravagant idea to advance no farther, but to return to my own home. I
communicated my intention to my companion, but he for his part wished
to follow out his enterprise and seek his good fortune; so I prepared to
return.
41
THE FOURTH CHAPTER

On my return journey I began to reflect on the time which I had lost in
travelling, and on the great expense which I had been at without any
return, and without having made any acquisition of that which I wished for
and which had caused me to undertake the voyage. I had, however,
taken the resolution of returning to my home on quitting Arabia Deserta
by way of Palestine, and so into Egypt; and I was six months on the way.
I at length arrived at a little town called Arachi, situated on the bank of the
Nile, where I lodged with an old Jew named Aaron, where indeed I had
already lodged before in my journey; and I communicated unto him my
sentiments.
He asked me how I had succeeded, and whether I had found that which I
wished. I answered mournfully that I had done absolutely nothing, and I
made him an exact recital of the labours and troubles which I had
undergone, and my recital was accompanied by my tears which I could
not help shedding in abundance, so that I attracted the compassion of the
old man, and he began to try to comfort me by telling me that during my
journey he had heard say that in a desert place not far from the aforesaid
town of Arachi dwelt a very learned and pious man whose name was
Abramelino, and he exhorted me that as I had already done so much, not
to fail to visit him, that perhaps the most merciful God might regard me
with pity, and grant me that which I righteously wished for. It seemed to
me as though I was listening to a voice, not human but celestial, and I felt
a joy in mine heart such as I could not express; and I had neither rest nor
intermission until Aaron found me a man who conducted me to the
nearest route, by which walking upon fine sand during the space of three
days and a half without seeing any human habitation I at length arrived at
the foot of a hill of no great height, and which was entirely surrounded by
trees.
My guide then said, "In this small wood dwelleth the man whom you
seek;" and having showed me the direction to take he wished to
accompany me no further, and having taken his leave of me he returned
home by the same route by which we had come, together with his mule
which had served to carry our food. Finding myself in this situation I could
think of no other thing to do than to submit myself to the help of the divine
providence by invoking his very holy name, who then granted unto me his
most holy grace, for in turning my eyes in the aforementioned direction, I
beheld coming towards me a venerable aged man, who saluted me in the
42
Chaldean language in a loving manner, inviting me to go with him into his

habitation; the which courtesy I accepted with an extreme pleasure,
realising in that moment how great is the providence of the Lord.
The good old man was very courteous to me and treated me very kindly,
and during an infinitude of days he never spake unto me of any other
matter than of the fear of God, exhorting me to lead ever a well-regulated
life, and from time to time warned me of certain errors which man
commits through human frailty, and, further, he made me understand that
he detested the acquisition of riches and goods which we were constantly
employed in gaining in our towns through so severe usury exacted from,
and harm wrought to, our neighbour. He required from me a very solemn
and precise promise to change my manner of life, and to live not
according to our false dogmas, but in the way and law of the Lord. The
which promise I having ever after inviolably observed, and being later on
again among my relatives and other Jews, I passed among them for a
wicked and foolish man; but I said in myself, "Let the will of God be done,
and let not respect of persons turn us aside from the right path, seeing
that man is a deceiver".
The aforesaid Abramelin, knowing the ardent desire which I had to learn,
he gave me two manuscript books, very similar in form unto these which I
now bequeath unto thee, O Lamech, my son; but very obscure: and he
told me to copy them for myself with care, which I did, and carefully
examined both the one and the other. And he asked me if I had any
money, I answered unto him "Yes".
He said unto me that he required ten golden florins, which he must
himself, according to the order which the Lord had given unto him,
distribute by way of alms among seventy-two poor persons, who were
obliged to repeat certain Psalms; and having kept the feast of Saturday,
which is the day of the Sabbath, he set out to go to Arachi, because it
was requisite that he should himself distribute the money. And he ordered
me to fast for three days, that is to say, the Wednesday, Thursday, and
Friday following; contenting myself with only a single repast in the day,
wherein was to be neither blood nor dead things; also he commanded me
to make this commencement with exactness, and not to fail in the least
thing, for in order to operate well it is very necessary to begin well, and he
instructed me to repeat all the seven Psalms of David one single time in
these three days; and not to do or practise any servile operation.
The day being come he set out, and took with him the money which I had
43
given him. I faithfully obeyed him, executing from point to point that which
he had ordered me to do. His return was fifteen days later, and being at
last arrived he ordered me the day following (which was a Tuesday),
before the rising of the Sun, to make with great humility and devotion a
general confession of all my life unto the Lord, with a true and firm
proposal and resolution to serve and fear him otherwise than I had done
in the past, and to wish to live and die in his most holy law, and in
obedience unto him. I performed my confession with all the attention and
exactitude necessary. It lasted until the going down of the Sun; and the
day following I presented myself unto Abramelin, who with a smiling
countenance said unto me, "It is thus I would ever have you".
He then conducted me into his own apartment where I took the two little
manuscripts which I had copied; and he asked of me whether truly, and
without fear, I wished for the divine science and for the True Magic. I
answered unto him that it was the only end and unique motive which had
induced me to undertake a so long and troublesome voyage, with the
view of receiving this special grace from the Lord. "And I," said Abramelin,
"trusting in the mercy of the Lord, I grant and accord unto thee this holy
science, which thou must acquire in the manner which is prescribed unto
thee in the two little manuscript books, without omitting the least
imaginable thing of their contents; and not in any way to gloss or
comment upon that which may be or may not be, seeing that the artist
who hath made that work is the same God who from nothingness hath
created all things.
Thou shalt in no way use this sacred science to offend the great God, and
to work ill unto thy neighbour; thou shalt communicate it unto no living
person whom thou dost not thoroughly know by long practice and
conversation, examining well whether such a person really intendeth to
work for the good or for the evil. And if thou shalt wish to grant it unto him,
thou shalt well observe and punctually, the same fashion and manner,
which I have made use of with thee. And if thou doest otherwise, he who
shall receive it shall draw no fruit therefrom. Keep thyself as thou wouldst
from a serpent from selling this science, and from making merchandise of
it; because the grace of the Lord is given unto us free and gratis, and we
ought in no wise to sell the same. This veritable science shall remain in
thee and thy generation for the space of seventy-two years, and will not
remain longer in our Sect.
44
Let not thy curiosity push thee on to understand the cause of this, but
figure to thyself that we are so good7 that our sect hath become
insupportable not only to the whole human race, but even to God
himself!"
I wished in receiving these two small manuscript books to throw myself on
my knees before him, but he rebuked me, saying that we ought only to
bend the knee before God.
I avow that these two books were so exactly written, that thou, O Lamech
my son, mayest see them after my death, and thou shalt thus recognise
how much respect I have for thee. It is true that before my departure I well
read and studied them, and when I found anything difficult or obscure I
had recourse unto Abramelin, who with charity and patience explained it
unto me. Being thoroughly instructed, I took leave of him, and having
received his paternal blessing; a symbol which is not only in use among
the Christians, but which was also the custom with our forefathers; I also
departed, and I took the route to Constantinople, whither having arrived I
fell sick, and my malady lasted for the space of two months; but the Lord
in his mercy delivered me therefrom, so that I soon regained my strength,
and finding a vessel ready to depart for Venice I embarked thereon, and I
arrived there, and having rested some days I set out to go unto Trieste,
where having landed, I took the road through the country of Dalmatia, and
arrived at length at my paternal home, where I lived among my relatives
and my brothers.
45
THE FIFTH CHAPTER

It is not sufficient to travel and journey abroad and see many lands, if one
does not draw some useful experience therefrom. Wherefore, in order to
show unto thee a good example, I will in this chapter speak of the
mysteries1 of this art which I discovered in one way and another while
travelling in the world, and also of the measure and understanding of their
various sciences; while, in the sixth chapter following, I will recount the
things which I have learned and seen with some among them, and
whether in actual practice I found them true or false.
I have already before told you that my first master had been the Rabbin
Moses at Mayence, who was indeed a good man, but entirely ignorant of
the true mystery and of the veritable magic. He only devoted himself to
certain superstitious secrets which he had collected from various infidels,
and which were full of the nonsense and foolishness of pagans and
idolaters; to such an extent that the good angels and holy spirits judged
him unworthy of their visits and conversation; and the evil spirits mocked
him to a ridiculous extent. At times, indeed, they spake to him voluntarily
and by caprice, and obeyed him in matters vile, profane, and of no
account, in order the better to entrap, deceive and hinder him from
searching further for the true and certain foundation of this great science.
At Argentine I found a Christian called James, who was reputed as a
learned and very skilful man; but his art was the art of the juggler, or
cupand-balls player; and not that of the magician.
In the town of Prague I found a wicked man named Antony, aged
twentyfive years, who in truth showed me wonderful and supernatural
things, but may God preserve us from falling into so great an error, for the
infamous wretch avowed to me that he had made a pact with the demon,
and had given himself over to him in body and in soul, and that he had
renounced God and all the saints; while, on the other hand, the deceitful
Leviathan had promised him forty years of life to do his pleasure.
He made every effort, as he was obliged to by the pact, to persuade me
and drag me to the precipice of the same error and misery; but at first I
kept myself apart from him, and at last I took flight. Unto this day do they
sing in the streets of the terrible end which befel him, may the Lord God
of his mercy preserve us from such a misfortune. This should serve us as
a mirror of warning to keep far from us all evil undertakings and
pernicious curiosity.
46
In Austria I found an infinitude, but all were either ignorant, or like unto the
Bohemians.
In the Kingdom of Hungary I found but persons knowing neither God nor
Devil, and who were worse than the beasts.
In Greece I found many wise and prudent men, but, however, all of them
were infidels, among whom there were three who principally dwelt in
desert places, who showed unto me great things, such as how to raise
tempests in a moment, how to make the Sun appear in the night, how to
stop the course of rivers, and how to make night appear at midday, the
whole by the power of their enchantments, and by applying superstitious
ceremonies.
Near Constantinople, in a place called Ephiha, there was a certain man,
who, instead of enchantments, made use of certain numbers which he
wrote upon the earth; and by means of these he caused certain
extravagant and terrifying visions to appear; but in all these arts there was
no practical use, but only the loss of soul and of body, because all these
only worked by particular pacts, which had no true foundation; also all
these arts demanded a very long space of time, and they were very false,
and when these men were unsuccessful they had always ready a
thousand lies and excuses.
In the same city of Constantinople I found two men of our Law, namely,
Simon and the Rabbin Abrahame, whom we may class with Rabbin
Moses Of Mayence.
In Egypt the first time I found five persons who were esteemed and
reputed as wise men, among whom were four, namely, Horay, Abimech,
Alcaon, and Orilach, who performed their operations by the means of the
course of the stars and of the constellations, adding many diabolical
conjurations and impious and profane prayers, and performing the whole
with great difficulty. The fifth, named Abimelu, operated by the means and
aid of demons, to whom he prepared statues, and sacrificed, and thus
they served him with their abominable arts.
In Arabia they made use of plants, of herbs, and of stones as well
precious as common. The divine mercy inspired me to return thence, and
led me to Abramelin, who was he who declared unto me the secret, and
opened unto me the fountain and true source of the sacred mystery, and
47
of the veritable and ancient magic which God had given unto our
forefathers.
Also at Paris I found a wise man called Joseph, who, having denied the
Christian faith, had made himself a Jew. This man truly practised magic in
the same manner as Abramelin, but he was very far from arriving at
perfection therein; because God, who is just, never granteth the perfect,
veritable and fundamental treasure unto those who deny him;
notwithstanding that in the rest of their life they might be the most holy
and perfect men in the world. I am astonished when I consider the
blindness of many persons who let themselves be led by evil masters,
who take pleasure in falsehood, and, we may rather say, in the demon
himself; giving themselves over unto sorceries and idolatries, one in one
manner, another in another manner, with the result of losing their souls.
But the truth is so great, the Devil is so deceitful and malicious, and the
World so frail and so infamous that I must admit that things cannot be
otherwise. Let us then open our eyes, and follow that which I shall lay
down in the following chapters; and let us not walk in another path,
whether of the Devil, or of men, or of books which boast of their magic; for
in truth I declare unto thee that I had so great a quantity of such matters
written out with so much art, that had I not had these of Abramelin, I could
herein have given thee those. However, it is true that just as there is only
one God, that not one of these books is worth an obolus. Yet with all this
there are men so blind that they buy them at exorbitant prices, and they
lose their money, their time, and their pains, and which is worse, very
often their souls as well.
48
THE SIXTH CHAPTER

The fear of the Lord is the true wisdom, and he who hath it not can in no
way penetrate the true secrets of magic, and he but buildeth upon a
foundation of sand, and his building can in no way last. The Rabbin
Moses persuaded me to be wise, while he himself, with words which
neither he himself nor any other person understood, and with extravagant
symbols made bells to sound, and while with execrable conjurations he
made appear in glasses him who had committed a theft, and while he
made a water causing an old man to appear young (and that only for the
space of two hours and no longer). All the which things he indeed taught
me, but the whole was but vanity, low curiosity, and a pure deception of
the demon, leading to no useful end imaginable, and tending to the loss
of the soul. And when I had the veritable knowledge of the Sacred Magic,
I both forgot them, and banished them from mine heart.
That impious Bohemian, with the aid and assistance of his associate,
performed astounding feats. He rendered himself invisible, he used to fly
in the air, he used to enter through the keyholes into locked-up rooms, he
knew our greatest secrets, and once he told me things which God alone
could know. But his art cost him too dear, for the Devil had made him
swear in the pact that he would use all his secrets to the dishonour of
God, and to the prejudice of his neighbour. Ultimately his body was found
dragged through the streets, and his head without any tongue therein,
lying in a drain. And this was all the profit he drew from his diabolical
science and magic.
In Austria I found an infinitude of magicians who only occupied
themselves in killing and maiming men, in putting discord among married
people, in causing divorces, in tying witch-knots in osier or willow
branches to stop the flow of milk in the breasts of nursing women, and
similar infamies. But these miserable wretches had made a pact with the
Devil, and had become his slaves, having sworn unto him that they would
work without cessation to destroy all living creatures. Some of these had
two years (for their pact) to run, some three, and after that time they
underwent the same fate as the Bohemian.
At Lintz I worked with a young woman, who one evening invited me to go
with her, assuring me that without any risk she would conduct me to a
place where I greatly desired to find myself. I allowed myself to be
persuaded by her promises. She then gave unto me an unguent, with
49
which I rubbed the principal pulses of my feet and hands; the which she
did also; and at first it appeared to me that I was flying in the air in the
place which I wished, and which I had in no way mentioned to her.
I pass over in silence and out of respect, that which I saw, which was
admirable, and appearing to myself to have remained there a long while, I
felt as if I were just awakening from a profound sleep, and I had great
pain in my head and deep melancholy. I turned round and saw that she
was seated at my side. She began to recount to me what she had seen,
but that which I had seen was entirely different. I was, however, much
astonished, because it appeared to me as if I had been really and
corporeally in the place, and there in reality to have seen that which had
happened. However, I asked her one day to go alone to that same place,
and to bring me back news of a friend whom I knew for certain was
distant 200 leagues. She promised to do so in the space of an hour. She
rubbed herself with the same unguent, and I was very expectant to see
her fly away; but she fell to the ground and remained there about three
hours as if she were dead, so that I began to think that she really was
dead. At last she began to stir like a person who is waking, then she rose
to an upright position, and with much pleasure began to give me the
account of her expedition, saying that she had been in the place where
my friend was, and all that he was doing; the which was entirely contrary
to his profession. Whence I concluded that what she had just told me was
a simple dream, and that this unguent was a causer of a phantastic sleep;
whereon she confessed to me that this unguent had been given to her by
the Devil.
All the arts of the Greeks are enchantments and fascinations, and the
demons hold them enchained in these accursed arts so that the
foundation of the true magic may be unknown to them which would
render them more powerful than they; and I was the more confirmed in
this opinion because their operations were of no practical use whatever,
and caused injury unto him who put them into practice, as in fact many of
them avowed plainly to me, when I had the true and Sacred Magic. There
are also many operations which they say are handed down from the
ancient Sibyls. There is an art called White and Black; another angelical,
Teatim; in which I avow that I have seen orations so learned and
beautiful, that had I not known the venom therein hidden, I would have
given them herein. I say all this because it is very easy to him who is not
constantly upon his guard to err.
50
One old scribbler of symbols gave me many enchantments which only

tended to work evil. He performed other operations by means of numbers,
which were all odd, and of a triple proportion, in no way similar to the
other, and for proof of this, he caused by such means in my presence a
very fine tree which was near my house to fall to the ground, and all the
leaves and fruits were consumed in a very short time. And he told me that
in numbers there was hidden a very great mystery, because that by the
means of numbers one can perform all the operations for friendships,
riches, honours, and all sorts of things, good and evil; and he assured me
that he had tried them, but that yet some that he knew to be very true had
not yet succeeded with him. With regard to this particular, I found out the
reason through the wise Abramelin, who told me that this came and
depended from a divine ministry, that is to say, from the Qabalah, and
that without that, one could not succeed. All these things have I beheld,
and many others, and those who possessed these secrets gave them to
me out of friendship. I burned these recipes afterwards in the house of
Abramelin, they being absolutely things very far removed from the will of
God, and contrary to the charity which we owe unto our neighbour.
Every learned and prudent man may fall if he be not defended and guided
by the angel of the Lord, who aided me, and prevented me from falling
into such a state of wretchedness, and who led me undeserving from the
mire of darkness unto the light of the truth. I have known and felt the
effects of the goodness of the wise Abraha Melin, who of his own free will,
and before I had asked him so to do, accepted me for his disciple. And
before that I had declared my wish unto him he would accomplish and
fulfil my desire; and all that I wished to obtain from him he knew before I
could open my mouth. Also he recounted to me all that I had seen, done,
and suffered from the time of my father's death down to this moment; and
this in words obscure and as it were prophetic, which I did not then
comprehend, but which I understood later.
He told me many things touching my good fortune, but, which was the
principal thing, he discovered to me the source of the veritable Qabalah,
the which according to our custom, I have in turn communicated unto
thine elder brother Joseph, after that he had fulfilled the requisite
conditions without the accomplishment of which the Qabalah and this
Sacred Magic cannot be exercised, and which I will recount in the two
following books.
51
Afterwards he did manifest unto me the regimen of the mystery of that

Sacred Magic which was exercised and put into practice by our
forefathers and progenitors, Noah, Abraham, Jacob, Moses, David, and
Solomon, among whom the last misused it, and he received the
punishment thereof during his life.
In the second book I will describe the whole faithfully and clearly, in order
that if the Lord God should wish to dispose of me before that thou shalt
have attained a competent age, thou shalt find these three small
manuscript books as forming at the same time both an inestimable
treasure and a faithful master and teacher; because there are very many
secrets in the symbols of the third book which I have seen made
experiment of with mine own eyes by Abramelim, and to be perfectly true,
and which afterwards I myself have performed. And after him I found no
one who worked these things truly; and although Joseph at Paris walked
in the same path, nevertheless God, as a just judge, did not in any way
wish to grant unto him the Sacred Magic in its entirety, because he had
despised the Christian law. For it is an indubitable and evident thing that
he who is born Christian, Jew, Pagan, Turk, infidel, or whatever religion it
may be, can arrive at the perfection of this work or art and become a
master, but he who hath abandoned his natural law, and embraced
another religion opposed to his own, can never arrive at the summit of
this sacred science.
52
THE SEVENTH CHAPTER

God, the father of mercy, having granted unto me the grace to return safe
and sound into my country; I paid unto him according to my small power,
some little portion of that which I owed him; thanking him for so many
benefits which I had received from him, and in particular for the
acquisition of the Qabalah which I had made at the house of Abramelim.
It now only remained for me to reduce to practice this Sacred Magic, but
many things of importance and hindrances presented themselves; among
the which my marriage was one of the greatest. I therefore judged it fitting
to defer putting it in practice, and a principal obstacle was the
inconvenience of the place in which I dwelt.
I resolved to absent myself suddenly, and go away into the Hercynian
forests, and there remain during the time necessary for this operation,
and lead a solitary life. It was not possible for me to do it sooner for many
reasons and dangers of which latter I ran a risk in that place, besides
which it would be necessary to leave my wife, who was young and now
enceinte.
Finally, I resolved to follow the example of Abramelin, and I divided my
house into two parts; I took another house at rent, which I in part
furnished, and I gave over to one of my uncles the care of providing the
necessaries of life and the needs thereof. Meanwhile I with my wife and a
servant remained in my own house, and I began to accustom myself to
the solitary life, which it was to me extremely difficult to support, because
of the melancholic humour which dominated me, and I lived thus till the
season of Easter which I celebrated with all the family according to
custom.
Then first, on the following day, in the name and to the honour of God
almighty the creator of Heaven and of Earth, I commenced this holy
operation, and I continued it for six Moons without omitting the slightest
detail, as thou wilt understand later. And the period of the six Moons
being expired, the Lord granted unto me his grace by his mercy;
according to the promise made unto our forefathers, since while I was
making my prayer unto him he deigned to grant unto me the vision and
apparition of his holy angels, together with which I experienced so great
joy, consolation and contentment of soul, that I could neither express it
nor put it into writing. And during the three days, while I was enjoying this
sweet and delightful presence with an indicible contentment, my holy
53
angel, whom God the most merciful had destined from my creation for my
guardian, spake unto me with the greatest goodness and affection; who
not only manifested unto me the Veritable Magic, but even made easier
for me the means of obtaining it. He confirmed as being true the symbols
of the Qabalah which I had received from Abramelin; and he gave me the
fundamental means by which I could have an infinitude of others in my
operations according tomy pleasure, assuring me that he would instruct
me fully thereon. (These symbols are all like those of the third book.) He
gave me further very useful advice and admonition, such as an angel
could give; how I should govern myself the following days with the evil
spirits so as to constrain them to obey me; the which I duly followed out
fulfilling always from point to point his instructions very faithfully, and by
the grace of God Iconstrained them to obey me and to appear in the
place destined for this operation; and they obligated themselves to obey
me, and to be subject unto me. And since then even until now, without
offending God and the holy angels I have held them in my power and
command, always assisted by the power of God and of his holy angels.
And this with so great a prosperity of our house, that I confess that I held
myself back from the vast riches which I could have accumulated;
although I possess enough to be counted among the number of the rich,
as thou wilt know when thou shalt be more advanced in age. May the
grace of the Lord, and the defence and protection of his holy angels never
then depart from me, Abraham, nor from my two sons Joseph and
Lamech; nor from all those who by your means and by the will of God,
shall receive this operation! So be it!
54
THE EIGHTH CHAPTER

In order to show that man ought to make use of the good things of the
Lord by applying them unto a good end, that is to say, unto his honour
and glory, both for his own use and that of his neighbour; I will describe in
a few words in this present chapter many and the most considerable
operations which I have carried out; and the which, with the aid of the
allpowerful Lord and of the holy angels, by the means of this art I have
easily conducted unto the desired end. And I write not this description in
any way to vaunt myself, nor out of vainglory, the which would be a great
sin against God, because it is he who hath done the whole, and not I; but
only do I write this that it may serve for instruction unto others, so that
they may know wherein they ought to avail themselves of this art, as also
that they may use it to the honour of him who hath given this wisdom unto
men, and glorify him; and in order that each one may know how great and
inexhaustible are the treasures of the Lord, and render unto him particular
thanks for so precious a gift. And especially (do I thank him) for having
granted unto me, who am but a little worm of Earth, through the means of
Abramelin the power to give and communicate unto others this sacred
science. After my death a book will be found, which I commenced to write
at the time when I was beginning to put in practice this art, which,
reckoning the number of the years, was in 1409, until today on which I am
arrived at the 96th year of mine age, with all honour and augmentation of
fortune; and in this book can be read in detail even to the very least thing
which I have done. But here, as I have aforesaid, I will describe only the
most remarkable.
Up till now I have healed of persons of all conditions, bewitched unto
death, no less than 8413, and belonging unto all religions, without making
an exception in any case.
I gave unto mine Emperor Sigismond, a very clement prince, a familiar
spirit of the Second Hierarchy, even as he commanded me, and he
availed himself of its services with prudence. He wished also to possess
the secret of the whole operation, but as I was warned by the Lord that it
was not his will, he contented himself with what was permitted, not as
Emperor, but as a private person; and I even by means of mine art
facilitated his marriage with his wife; and I caused him to overcome the
great difficulties which opposed his marriage.
55
I delivered also the Count Frederick by the means of 2000 artificial

cavalry (the which I by mine art caused to appear according unto the
tenor of the twenty-ninth chapter of the third book here following), free out
of the hands of the Duke Leopold of Saxonia; the which Count Frederick
without me would have lost both his own life, and his estate as well
(which latter would not have descended) unto his heirs.
Unto the Bishop of our city also, I showed the betrayal of his government
at Orembergh, one year before the same occurred; and I say no more
concerning this because he is an Ecclesiastic, passing over in silence all
that I have further done to render unto him service.
The Count of Varvich was delivered by me from prison in England the
night before he was to have been beheaded.
I aided the flight of the Duke, and of his Pope John, from the Council of
Constance, who would otherwise have fallen into the hands of the
enraged Emperor; and the latter having asked me to predict unto him
which one of the two Popes, John XXIII and Martin V, should gain in the
end, my prophecy was verified; that fortune befalling which I had
predicted unto him at Ratisbon.
At the time when I was lodged at the house of the Duke Of Bavaria, my
Lord, for matters of the greatest importance; the door of my room was
forced, and I had the value of 83,000 Hungarian pieces stolen from me in
jewels and money. As soon as I returned, the thief (although he was a
Bishop!) was forced to himself bring it back to me in person and to return
with his own hands to me the money, jewels, and account books, and to
give me the principal reasons which had forced him to commit the theft,
rather than any other person.
Six months ago I did write unto the Grecian Emperor, and I warned him
that the affairs of his Empire were in a very bad condition, and that his
Empire itself was on the brink of ruin, unless he could appease the anger
of God. As there only remaineth unto me but a little while to live, those
who remain after me will receive the news of the result of this prophecy.
The operation of the thirteenth chapter of the second book, I have twice
performed; once in the house of Savonia; and another time in the
Marquisate of Magdeburgh, and I was the cause that their estates were
handed down unto their children.
56
Now when once the faculty of being able to avail oneself of the Sacred
Magic hath been obtained, it is permissible to demand from the angel a
sum of coined money proportionate unto thy birth, quality and capacity,
the which without difficulty will be granted unto thee. Such money is taken
from the hidden treasures. It is, however, necessary to note that in all
treasures one is allowed to take the fifth part, God permitting the same,
although some braggart chatterers do say that there be an infinitude
hereof which be destined and reserved unto Antichrist, I do not for a
moment say that this may not be true; but undoubtedly from the same
treasures one may also take the fifth part. There are yet more which be
destined unto others. Mine own particular treasure was assigned unto me
at Herbipolis; and I performed the operation of the eighth chapter of the
third book; it was not in any way guarded, and was very ancient. It was of
gold, which had never been struck into ingots; and which I afterwards
caused to be beaten out and converted into its equivalent weight of
goldenflorins, by the spirits; the which was done in a few hours; (and I did
this operation seeing that) mine own possessions were few and of little
worth; and so poor was I that in order to marry a person who had a
considerable dowry, I was forced to make use of mine art, and I employed
the fourth sign of the third book and the third sign of the nineteenth
chapter; and I married my cousin with 40,000 golden florins as a dowry,
the which sum served as a cover to my fortune.
All the signs which are in the eighteenth chapter have been made use of
by me so many times that I could not count them. However, they are all
given in the book already mentioned.
I made great and wonderful experiments with the signs of the second and
eighth chapters of the third book. The first sign of the first chapter of the
third book is the most perfect.
It is necessary to be prompt and adroit in all these operations, seeing that
in the things which belong unto God we can easily commit still greater
errors than those into which Solomon fell.
All these signs have I worked with great ease and pleasure, and with very
great utility (unto myself and others). All these operations and others in
infinite number have I performed by the signs which be in the third book,
and never have I failed in attaining mine end. I have always been obeyed
(by the spirits), and everything hath succeeded with me because I have
myself obeyed the commandments of God. Also I have from point to point
57
followed out that which mine angel hath counselled and prescribed unto
me; following out also exactly that which Abra-Melin had taught me, the
which is the same that I shall write in the two following books, and which I
shall exemplify and explain more clearly; because the instructions which I
received, although in very obscure words and hieroglyphics, have caused
me to attain mine object, and have never permitted me to err and fall into
pagan, strange, and superstitious idolatries; I being always kept in the
way of the Lord, who is the true, the only, the infallible end, for arriving at
the possession of this Sacred Magic.
58
THE NINTH CHAPTER

The infamous Belial hath no other desire than that of obtaining the power
of hiding and obscuring the true divine wisdom, so that he may have more
means of blinding simple men and of leading them by the nose; so that
they may always remain in their simplicity, and in their error, and that they
may not discover the way which leadeth unto the true wisdom; seeing that
otherwise it is certain that both he and his kingdom would remain bound
and that he would lose the title which he giveth himself of "Prince of this
World," having become the slave of man. This is wherefore he seeketh to
annul and destroy utterly this sacred wisdom. I, however, do pray all and
singular to be upon their guard, and in no way to despise the way and
wisdom of the Lord, nor to allow themselves to be seduced by the demon
and his adherents; for he is a liar and will be so eternally; and may the
truth forever flourish; for in following out and obeying with fidelity that
which I have written in these three books, not only shall we arrive at the
desired end, but we shall sensibly know and feel the grace of the Lord,
and the actual assistance of his holy angels, who take an incredible
pleasure in seeing that they are obeyed and that you intend to follow out
the commandments of God, and that their instructions are observed.
Such then are the particular points upon which I insist.
This wisdom hath its foundation in the high and holy Qabalah which is not
granted unto any other than unto the first-born, even as God hath
ordained, and as it was observed by our predecessors. Thence arose the
difference, and the truck or exchange between Jacob and Esau; the
primogeniture being the Qabalah, which is much nobler and greater than
the Sacred Magic. And by the Qabalah we can arrive at the Sacred
Magic, but by the latter we cannot have the Qabalah. Unto the child of a
servant, or of an adulterer, the Qabalah is not granted, but only unto a
legitimate child; as occurred in the case of Isaac and Ishmael; but the
sacred wisdom through the mercy of God all can acquire, provided that
they walk in the right path; and each one should content himself with the
gift and grace of the Lord. And this must not be done out of curiosity, and
with extravagant and ridiculous scruples, wishing to know and understand
more than is right; seeing that temerity is certainly punished by God, who
then permitteth him who is presumptuous not only to be turned aside out
of the true way by the Second Causes, but also the demon hath power
over him, and he ruineth and exterminateth him in such a manner, that we
can only say that he himself is the sole cause of his own ruin and misery.
It is certain that the Old Serpent will attempt to contaminate the present
59
book with his venom, and even to destroy and lose it utterly, but O
Lamech! as a faithful father I entreat thee by the true God who hath
created thee and all things, and I entreat every other person who by thy
means shall receive this method of operating, not to be induced or
persuaded to have any other sentiment or opinion, or to believe the
contrary. Pray unto God and ask him for his assistance, and place all thy
confidence in him alone. And although thou canst not have the
understanding of the Qabalah, nevertheless the holy guardian angels at
the end of the six Moons or months will manifest unto thee that which is
sufficient for the possession of this Sacred Magic.
Wherefore all the signs and symbols given in the third book, are written
with letters of the fourth hierarchy; but the mysterious words wherein
consisteth the secret have their origin in and are drawn from the Hebrew,
Latin, Greek, Chaldean, Persian, and Arabian languages by a singular
mystery and according unto the will of the most wise Architect and
Fabricator of the Universe, who alone dominateth and governeth it by his
all-power; all the monarchies and kingdoms of the world are submitted
unto his infinite power, and unto this Sacred Magic and divine wisdom.
60
THE TENTH CHAPTER

It being understood that in this operation we have to do with a great and
powerful enemy, whom through our own weakness and human strength
or science we cannot resist without particular aid and assistance from the
holy angels, and from the Lord of the good spirits; it is necessary that
each one should always have God before his eyes, and in no way offend
Him.
On the other hand, he must always be upon his guard, and abstain as
from a mortal sin from flattering, obeying, regarding, or having respect to
the demon, and to his viperine race; neither must he submit himself unto
him in the slightest thing, for that would be his ruin and the fatal loss of his
soul.
As it happened unto all the seed descended from Noah, Lot, Ishmael, and
others who did possess the blessed land (before our forefathers) who
inherited this wisdom from father to son, from family to family; but in the
course of time having lent an ear unto the treacherous enemy, they let
themselves be turned away from the veritable path, and did lose the true
science which they had received from God by the means of their fathers,
and gave themselves over unto superstitious sciences, and unto
diabolical enchantments, and unto abominable idolatries, the which was
the cause that thereafter God did chastise them, defy them, and chase
them from their country; and did introduce in their stead our
predecessors; from which same errors again later came the cause of our
present misery and servitude, the which will last even unto the end of the
world; since they in no way wished to know the gift which God had given
unto them, but instead abandoned it to embrace and follow the deceits of
the demon.
This is wherefore each one should take care to submit himself unto him
neither by acts, nor by words, nor by thoughts, because he is so adroit
and prompt that he can seize one unexpectedly; just as a spider may take
a bird. Let that miserable Bohemian and the others whom I have before
mentioned, serve thee for an example to avoid (even as they did unto
me).
In the commencement of the operation there appeareth a man of majestic
appearance, who with great affability doth promise unto thee marvellous
things. Consider all this as pure vanity, for without the permission of God
61
he can give nothing; but he will do it unto the damage and prejudice, ruin
and eternal damnation of whomsoever putteth faith in him, and believeth
in him; as we may see in the Holy Scripture in the matter of Pharaoh and
his adherents, the which despised the veritable and certain wisdom of
Moses and Aaron, and were in the beginning backed up by the Devil who
showed them by the means of enchantments that he could both do and
put in practice all the works of the aforesaid holy men, whence he
ultimately did reduce them to such a condition of obstinacy and blindness,
that without perceiving their own error and the deceit of the demon, they
were cruelly chastised by God with divers plagues, and were at last all
drowned in the Red Sea. This is wherefore in conclusion I say unto thee
in few words, that we must rely upon God alone, and put all our
confidence in him.
62
THE ELEVENTH CHAPTER

God be my witness that I have not learned this science out of curiosity,
nor in order to avail myself of it for an evil purpose, but rather to use it for
the honour and glory of my, for mine own use, and for that of my
neighbour; and I have never wished to employ it for vain and vile things,
but I have always laboured with all my strength to aid all creatures,
friends and enemies, faithful and unfaithful, as well the one as the other,
with a perfect will and a good heart, and I have also made use of it for the
animals.
I have before cited certain examples in order to show unto thee that God
Almighty doth not in any way grant the art or the science unto a person in
order that he may use it for himself alone, but in order that he may
provide for the needs of others, and of those who do not possess this
sacred science. This is why I pray everyone to follow mine example, and
if he doeth otherwise the malediction of the Lord will fall upon him, and as
for myself I shall be excusable and innocent before God, and before all
men.
In the third book there will be found a very beautiful garden, the like of
which assuredly no one hath ever made, and which no king nor emperor
hath ever possessed.
He who shall wish to be as an industrious bee therein, can there suck the
honey which it containeth in abundance; but if he shall maliciously wish to
transform himself into a spider, he can also draw poison from thence.
God, however, accordeth and giveth his grace, not unto the evil, but unto
the good; and if it seemeth unto thee that some chapters of the third book
can be rather applied unto evil and unto the hurt of our neighbour, than
unto a useful end; each one shall know that I have so placed them, in
order that we may understand that this science can be applied alike for
evil or for good, as I will show thee more fully in the other books. We must
then study to flee the evil and to obtain all the forces of good. He who
shall act thus all the days of his life shall have the succour and assistance
of the faithful, benign and holy angels; and he who shall use it for evil
shall be abandoned by the same angels, and shall be in the power of the
treacherous enemy, who never faileth to obey the commands of such an
one to work evil, in order to render him his slave. It is necessary to have
as a general rule and maxim which never faileth, that whenever thou shalt
see a man filled with an extraordinary desire to procure this operation for
63
himself, if thou wishest to give it unto him, it is necessary to test his

sincerity and his intentions, and delay him, according to the instructions
which I give unto thee in these three books. And if he seeketh to obtain it
by indiscreet methods, and sayeth unto thee that this operation may be
true or not true, feigning doubts in order to compel thee to give it unto
him, or that he maketh use of other stratagems, thou mayest then
conclude that such a man walketh not in the Way of the Lord. If any
person wisheth it in a way opposed to that which God employeth to grant
it, this would be presumptuous.
And if any person seeketh to obtain it not for himself, (but for either) a
child or a relative, who is not such as he should be who receiveth so great
a treasure; he who shall grant it unto him shall be culpable of a great evil,
and shall himself lose the grace and wisdom of the Lord, and shall
deprive his heirs of the same eternally.
If a man of evil life, whom one shall feel by means of this sacred science
will persist in his evil way of life, shall come unto thee to seek this sacred
science, it is probable that such a man doth not desire to use it for good
and in a right intention, but that having received it, he will use it for evil. I
have also in such case myself, however, seen and felt that God, who
penetrateth the secret of our hearts, hath put by indirect means obstacles
in the way of such an one's success, causing difficulties to arise of one
kind and another. So that he who at the first wisheth to possess this
science in order to use it against his neighbour, and to commit all sorts of
abominations, manifesteth himself as an unworthy person unto him who
had resolved to give it unto him.
Shun commerce, and the converse of those who actually in the search for
this science shall do and say all things which tend to evil; seeing that
such men can become the enchanters of the Devil. Thou shalt know the
rest hereafter in the other books. Here I am very prolix upon this point,
and I am exaggerating much, because it is certain that once the operation
is given in due form, it is an irrevocable act.
But if, on the other hand, after an exact examination and inquisition thou
shalt find a person tranquil and sincere, thou must aid him, because God
who hath aided thee wisheth also to aid him; unto this end hath he put
into thine hands this sacred science.
64
Thou must make every effort to procure peace amongst those who are at
discord, and sworn enemies among themselves; and it is imperative to do
good unto everyone, this being the sole and true means of rendering
favourable unto thee, God, the angels, and men; and of making the
demon thy slave, and obedient in all and through all. And such an one
shall pass the rest of his life with a good and right conscience, in honour
and peace, with contentment, and useful unto all beings. I entreat those
who shall be possessors of a so great treasure to employ it in the proper
manner, and never to cast it before swine.
Thou shalt use it for thyself, O Lamech, my son, but of the fruit which thou
shalt draw therefrom, thou shalt make partakers those who have need,
and the more thou shalt give, the more shall thy means increase. The
same shall happen unto him to whom thou shalt give it.
In these regions and countries we are slaves, and justly afflicted for our
sins and those of our fathers; however, we ought to serve the Lord in the
best manner which shall be possible unto us.
And by such an one shall the treasure be kept secret, and shall be given
unto his heirs as far as he can, being ware of disinheriting them in order
to give it unto others, and of causing it to fall into the hands of the infidels,
or of rendering the wicked possessors thereof.
65
THE TWELFTH CHAPTER

Mine intention was in no way to be so prolix in this first book; but what will
not paternal love do? and the importance of the matter permitteth it.
Let each one who will carry out this glorious enterprise rest in peace and
surety, because in these three books is comprised all that can be
necessary for this operation. For I have written it with much care,
attention, and exactitude; so that there is no phrase which doth not give
thee some instruction or advice. However, I pray such an one for the love
of God, who reigneth and will reign eternally, to commence no operation
unless beforehand for the space of six months he hath read and re-read
this book with care and attention, considering all points in detail; for I am
more than sure that he will not encounter any doubtful matter which he
will not be able to solve himself, but further day by day will he assume
unto himself a great and ardent desire, pleasure, and will, to undertake
this so glorious operation; the which can be effected by any person of any
religion soever,1 provided, however, that during the six Moons he hath not
committed any sin against the Law and commandments of God.
Now it remaineth unto me, O Lamech, my son, to show unto thee the
marks of my extreme paternal tenderness, by giving thee two principal
pieces of advice, by the means of which, and observing all the other
particulars which I shall describe, thou (and any person unto whom thou
shalt accord this sacred science) mayest indubitably arrive at the
perfection of this same wisdom. It is necessary, however, to understand
that many have undertaken this operation; and that some have obtained
their wish; but that there are others who have not succeeded, and the
reason of this hath been because their good angel hath not appeared
unto them in the day of the conjuration, their angel being by its nature
Amphiteron, because the angelic nature differeth to so great an extent
from that of men, that no understanding nor science could express or
describe it, as regardeth that great purity wherewith they be invested.
I do not wish that thou, Lamech, my son, and thy successor, and friends,
should be deprived of a so great treasure. I in no way wish to abandon
thee in so essential a matter. The other point is the Psalm which I will tell
thee also; and though thou givest the operation unto another person,
although he be a friend, thou shalt in no wise communicate this unto him,
because this Psalm is the preservative against all those to whom thou
shalt have given the holy magic, should they wish to make use of it
against thee; and thou shalt be able thyself to make excellent use of it
against them. This was granted by the Lord unto David for his own
preservation.
66
For the first point: the day being come when it is necessary to perform the
orations, prayers, and convocations of thy guardian angel, thou shalt
have a little child of the age of six, seven, or eight years at the most, who
shall be clothed in white, the which child thou shalt have washed from
head to foot, and thou shalt place upon his forehead a veil of white silk
very fine and transparent, which covereth the forehead even unto the
eyes; and upon the veil it is necessary to write beforehand in gold with a
brush a certain sign made and marked in the manner and order as it will
be shown in the third book; the which doth serve to conciliate and to give
grace unto the mortal and human creature to behold the face of the angel.
He who operateth shall do the same thing, but upon a veil of black silk,
and shall put it on in the same manner as the child. After this thou shalt
make the child enter into the oratory and thou shalt cause him to place
the fire and the perfume in the censer, then he shall kneel before the
altar; and he who performeth the operation shall be at the door and
prostrate upon the ground, making his oration, and supplicating his holy
angel that he will deign to appear and show himself unto this innocent
being giving unto him another sign if it be necessary in order to see him
himself on the two following days.
It is requisite that he who shall operate shall take heed to in no wise
regard the altar, but having his face towards the ground let him continue
his orations, and as soon as the child shall have seen the angel thou shalt
command him to tell thee, and to look upon the altar and take the lamen
or plate of silver which thou shalt have placed there for this purpose, in
order to bring it unto thee if it be necessary, and whatever other thing the
holy angel shall have written thereon, wherewith thou oughtest to work on
the two following days. The which being done he will disappear. Which
being carefully done, the child will tell thee (for this, it is necessary to
have instructed him beforehand), and thou shalt command him to bring
unto thee the little plate, by the which when thou hast received it thou
shalt know what the angel hath ordered thee to do. And thou shalt cause
it to be replaced upon the altar, and thou shalt quit the oratory, thou shalt
close it, and thou shalt in no wise enter therein during the first day, and
thou shalt be able to send away the child. And he who shall perform the
operation shall prepare himself during the rest of the day for the morrow
following, to enjoy the admirable presence of the holy guardian angel, in
order to obtain the end so earnestly desired, and which shall not fail thee
if thou followest the path which he shall show unto thee. And these two
signs are the key of the whole operation. Unto the glory of the most holy
name of God and of his holy angels!
67
END OF THE FIRST BOOK.
68
THE SECOND BOOK

OF THE
HOLY MAGIC
SOLOMON, AND OTHER
HOLY PATRIARCHS AND PROPHETS; WHICH TEACHETH
1458.
69
THE SECOND BOOK OF THE SACRED MAGIC.

PROLOGUE
The wisdom of the Lord is an inexhaustible fountain, neither hath there
ever been a man born who could penetrate its veritable origin and
foundation. The sages and holy fathers have drunk long draughts thereof,
and have been fully satisfied therewith. But with all this, not one among
them hath been able to comprehend or know the radical principles,
because the Creator of all things reserveth that unto himself; and, like a
jealous God, he hath indeed wished that we should enjoy the fruit thereof,
but he hath not wished to permit us to touch either the tree or its root. It is
then not only proper, but further also we are compelled to conform
ourselves unto the will of the Lord, walking in that path, by the which also
our predecessors went, without seeking out through a vain curiosity how it
is that God reigneth and governeth in his divine wisdom; because such
would be a very great presumption and a bestial conceit. Let us then
content ourselves with only knowing how many blessings he hath granted
unto us sinners, and what extent of power he hath given unto us mortals
over all things, and in what way it is permitted unto us to use them. Let us
then content ourselves with this, laying aside all other, curiosity,
observing without any comment that which shall be set down in this book
with fidelity. And if ye do follow my advice, ye shall be infallibly comforted
thereby.
70
THE FIRST CHAPTER

What and how many be the forms of veritable magic.
Whoso should wish to recount all the arts and operations which in our
times be reputed and preached abroad as wisdom and magical secrets;
he should as well undertake to count the waves and the sands of the sea;
seeing that the matter hath come to such a pass that every trick of a
buffoon is believed to be magic, that all the abominations of impious
enchanters, all diabolical illusions, all pagan idolatries, all superstitions,
fascinations, diabolical pacts, and lastly all that the gross blindness of the
world can touch with its hands and feet is reckoned as wisdom and
magic!
The physician, the astrologer, the enchanter, the sorceress, the idolater,
and the sacrilegious, is called of the common people a magician! Also he
who draweth his magic whether from the Sun, whether from the Moon,
whether from the evil spirits, whether from stones, herbs, animals, brutes,
or lastly from thousand divers sources, so that the Heaven itself is
astonished thereat. There be certain who draw their magic from air, from
earth, from fire, from water, from physiognomy, from the hand, from
mirrors, from glasses, from birds, from bread, from wine, and even from
the very excrements themselves; and yet, however, all this is reputed as
science!
I exhort you, ye who read, to have the fear of God, and to study justice,
because infallibly unto you shall be opened the gate of the true wisdom
which God gave unto Noah and unto his descendants Japhet, Abraham,
and Ishmael; and it was his wisdom that delivered Lot from the burning of
Sodom. Moses learned the same wisdom in the desert, from the Burning
Bush, and he taught it unto Aaron his brother. Joseph, Samuel, David,
Solomon, Elijah, and the Apostles, and Saint John particularly (from
whom we hold a most excellent book of prophecy) possessed it. Let every
one then know that this, this which I teach, is that same wisdom and
magic, and which is in this same book, and independent of any other
science, or wisdom, or magic, soever. It is, however, certainly true that
these miraculous operations have much in common with the Qabalah; it is
also true that there be other arts which have some stamp of wisdom; the
which alone would be nothing worth were they not mingled with the
foundation of the sacred ministry, whence later arose the Mixed Qabalah.
The arts are principally twelve. Four in number, 3, 5, 7, 9, among the
71
numbers in the Mixed Qabalah. The second is the most perfect one, the
which operateth by sign and visions. Two of the even numbers, namely 6
and 2, which operate with the stars and the celestial courses which we
call astronomy. Three consisteth in the metals, and 2 in the planets. As to
all these arts, the which be conjoined and mingled together with the
sacred Qabalah; both he who maketh use of these same, either alone, or
mingled with other things which be in no way from the Qabalah; and he
who seeketh to exercise himself in performing operations with these arts;
is alike liable to be deceived by the demon; seeing that of themselves
they possess no other virtue than a natural property; and they can
produce no other thing than probable effects, and they have absolutely no
power in spiritual and supernatural things; but if, however, on certain
occasions they cause you to behold any extraordinary effect, such is only
produced by impious and diabolical pacts and conjurations, the which
form of science ought to be called sorcery.
Finally, let us conclude that from the divine mystery are derived these
three kinds of Qabalah, viz.: the Mixed Qabalah, and the true wisdom,
and the (true) magic. We will, therefore, show forth this last, and the
manner of becoming its possessors in the name of God and of his
celestial court!
72
THE SECOND CHAPTER

What we should consider before undertaking this
operation.
We have already said what is the science which I am to teach you, that is
to say, that it is neither in any way human nor diabolical, but (that it is) the
true and divine wisdom and magic, which has been handed down by our
predecessors unto their successors as a hereditary treasure. In like
manner as I myself at present, so even should ye think, before entering
into this matter, and before taking possession of so great a treasure, how
much this gift is sublime and precious, and how vile and base are ye
yourselves who be about to receive it. This is wherefore I say unto ye that
the beginning of this wisdom is the fear of God and of justice. These be
the Tables of the Law, the Qabalah, and the magic; they should serve
unto ye for a rule. It is necessary that ye should begin to attach
yourselves unto the very beginning, if ye truly do wish to have the
veritable wisdom; and thus shall ye walk in the right path, and be able to
work; all the which is contained in this book, and all the which is therein
prescribed. For to undertake this operation with the simple intention of
using it unto dishonest, impious, and wicked ends, is neither just nor
reasonable; for it is absolutely necessary to perform this operation unto
the praise, honour, and glory of God; unto the use, health, and well-being
of your neighbour, whether friend or enemy; and generally for that of the
whole Earth.
Furthermore, it is also necessary to take into consideration other matters,
which though less important be still necessary; namely, whether ye be
capable, not only of commencing, but also of carrying through the
operation unto its end; this being a necessary point to consider before
coming unto a final determination upon the matter; because in this case
we are not negotiating with men, but with God, by the intermediation of
his holy angels, and with all spirits, both good and evil.
I am not here intending to play the saint and hypocrite, but it is necessary
to have a true and loyal heart. Ye have here to do with the Lord, Who not
only beholdeth the outer man, but who also penetrateth the inmost
recesses of the heart. But having taken a true, firm, and determined
resolution, relying upon the will of the Lord, ye shall arrive at your desired
end, and shall encounter no difficulty. Often also man is changeable, and
73
while beginning a thing well, finisheth it badly, being in no way firm and
stable in resolution. Ponder the matter then well before commencing, and
only begin this operation with the firm intention of carrying it out unto the
end, for no man can make a mock of the Lord with impunity.
Furthermore it is likewise necessary to think and consider whether your
goods and revenue be sufficient for this matter; and, further, whether if
your quality or estate be subject unto others, ye may have time and
convenience to undertake it; also whether wife or children may hinder you
herein; these being all matters worthy of observation, so as not to
commence the matter blindly.
The chief thing that ye should consider is whether ye be in good health,
because the body being feeble and unhealthy, it is subject to divers
infirmities, whence at length result impatience and want of power to
operate and pursue the operation; and a sick man can neither be clean
and pure, nor enjoy solitude; and in such a case it is better to cease.
Consider then the safety of your person, commencing this operation in a
place of safety, whence neither enemies nor any disgrace can drive you
out before the end; because ye must finish where ye begin.
But the first part of this chapter is the most important, and see that ye
keep well in mind the necessity of observing the same, because as
regardeth the other disadvantages, they may perhaps be remedied. And
be ye sure that God doth aid all those who put their confidence in him and
in his wisdom, and such as wish to live rightly, making use with honour of
the deceitful world, which ye shall hold in abomination, and see that ye
make no account of its opinion when ye shall be arrived at the perfection
of the work, and that ye shall be possessors of this Sacred Magic.
74
THE THIRD CHAPTER

Of the age and quality of the person who wisheth to
undertake this operation.
In order to describe the aforesaid and other considerations in the best
possible manner; I will here make a general recapitulation; mentioning
also first what may bring hindrance unto the matter.
It is, then, necessary that such a man give himself up unto a tranquil life,
and that his habits be temperate; that he should love retirement; that he
should be given neither unto avarice nor usury (that he should be the
legitimate child of his parents is a good thing, but not as necessary as for
the Qabalah, unto which no man born of a clandestine marriage can
attain); his age ought not to be less than twenty-five years nor more than
fifty; he should have no hereditary disease, such as virulent leprosy;
whether he be free or married importeth little; a valet, lackey, or other
domestic servant, can with difficulty arrive at the end required, being
bound unto others and not having the conveniences at disposal which are
necessary, and which this operation demandeth. Among women, there be
only virgins who are suitable; but I strongly advise that so important a
matter should not be communicated to them, because of the accidents
that they might cause by their curiosity and love of talk.
.
75
THE FOURTH CHAPTER

That the greater number of magical books are false and
vain.
All the books which treat of characters, extravagant figures, circles,
convocations, conjurations, invocations, and other like matters, even
although any one may see some effect thereby, should be rejected, being
works full of diabolical inventions; and ye should know that the demon
maketh use of an infinitude of methods to entrap and deceive mankind.
This I have myself proved, because when I have operated with the
veritable wisdom, all the other enchantments which I had learned have
ceased, and I could no longer operate with them, and I made a very
careful trial of those which I had learned with the Rabbin Moses; the
cause of which is that the deceit and fraud of the Demon can never
appear where the divine wisdom is. Furthermore, the most certain mark of
their falsity is the election of certain days; since there be those which God
hath expressly commanded to sanctify, we can freely operate on all other
days, and at all times.
And whenever ye shall see tables which do mark the days and their
differences, the celestial signs, and other like matters, pay no attention
thereto, because herein is a very great sin hidden, and a deceit of the
demon; it being one of his many methods of endeavouring to confound
the true wisdom of the Lord with evil matters. Because this true wisdom of
the Lord can operate and perform its effects every day, and at any
moment and second.
The gates of his grace are daily open, he wisheth, and it is pleasing unto
him to aid us, as well on this day as on the morrow; and in no way could it
be true that he desireth to be subjected to the day and hour which men
would wish to prescribe for him; seeing that he is the master to elect such
days as he himself wisheth, and also may they be sanctified! Flee also all
such books as those whose conjurations include extravagant,
inexplicable, and unheard-of words, and which be impossible to
understand, and which be truly the inventions of the devil and of wicked
men.
It is well also to recall that which I have said in the first book, viz., that in
the greater part of their conjurations there was not the slightest mention
76
made of God almighty, but only of invocations of the Devil, together with
very obscure Chaldean words. Surely it would be a rash thing of a man
who should deal with God by the intermediary of his holy angels, to think
that he ought to address him in a jargon, neither knowing what he saith
nor what he demandeth. Is it not an act of madness to wish to offend God
and his holy angels? Let us then walk in the right way, let us speak before
God with heart and mouth alike opened, in our own maternal language,
since how can ye pretend to obtain any grace from the Lord, if ye
yourselves know not what ye ask? Yet, however, the number of those
who lose themselves utterly in this vanity is infinite; many say that the
Grecian language is more agreeable unto God, it may be true that it was
perhaps at one time, but how many among us today understand it
perfectly, this is the reason why it would be the most senseless thing to
employ it.
I repeat then: Let each one speak his own language, because thus
understanding what it is that ye are demanding of the Lord, ye will obtain
all grace. And if ye demand a thing which is unjust, it will be refused unto
you, and ye will never obtain it.
77
THE FIFTH CHAPTER

That in this operation it is not necessary to regard the
time, nor the day, nor the hours.
There be no other days (to be observed) than those which God hath
ordained unto our fathers, viz., all Saturdays, which be the days of the
Sabbath; Passover; and the feast of Tabernacles; of which the former is
the fifteenth day of the first of our months, and the latter (beginneth on)
the fifteenth day of the seventh month. Now for this operation, any person
of whatever law he may be, provided that he confesseth that there is one
God, may observe these feasts. However, the true time of commencing
this operation is the first day after the celebration of the feasts of Easter,
and this was ordained unto Noah, being the most convenient time, and
the end falleth just at the (Feast of) Tabernacles. Our predecessors have
thus observed it, and the angel also hath approved it; and also it is more
advisable to follow good counsel and example, than to be obstinate and
follow one's own caprice; and also to treat the election of a particular day
as a pagan idea, paying no regard whatever either to time nor to the
elements; but only (having respect) unto him who granteth such a period.
Thus then will we be found men in the fittest condition of grace and
reconciled with God, and purer than at another period; and this being an
essential point ye ought well to consider the same.
It is, however, quite true that the elements and the constellations do
perform of themselves certain operations but this is to be understood of
natural things, as it happeneth that one day is different unto another; but
such a difference hath not operation in things spiritual and supernatural,
being thus useless for (higher) magical operations. The election of days is
still more useless, the election of hours and minutes whereof the ignorant
make so much, is further a very great error.
Therefore I have resolved to write this particular chapter, in order that this
error might appear more plainly evident unto him who readeth it, and that
he may draw profit therefrom so as to operate with judgment.
78
THE SIXTH CHAPTER

Concerning the planetary hours and other errors of the
astrologers.
It is true that the wise in astrology do write of the stars and of their
movements, and that these attaining thereto do produce divers effects in
inferior and elemental things; and such are, as we have already said,
natural operations of the elements; but that they should have power over
the spirits, or force in all supernatural things, that is not, neither can ever
be. But it will instead be found that by the permission of the great God it is
the spirits who govern the firmament. What foolishness then would it be to
implore the favour of the Sun, of the Moon, and of the stars, when the
object would be to have converse with angels and with spirits. Would it
not be an extravagant idea to demand from the wild beasts the
permission to go hunting? But what else is it, when they have elected a
certain day, when they have divided it up into many false divisions such
as hours, minutes, etc. "Here," they say, "we have the planetary hours,
and the planet appropriate to each hour." O what planets! O what fine
order! Tell me, I pray you, what advantage you get by this division. You
will reply, "A very great one, because it shows us in all things, either good
or bad fortune!" I tell you, and I repeat absolutely, that this is in no way
true; that they produce thus a change of the time and of the air, I in part
concede; but do me the grace to tell me how ye do divide the planetary
hours. I know that ye begin the first hour of the day with the planet which
itself giveth the name unto the day, as Sunday is ascribed to the Sun,
Monday to the Moon, Tuesday to Mars, Wednesday to Mercury, Thursday
to Jupiter, Friday to Venus, and Saturday to Saturn; then ye divide the
length of the day into twelve equal portions which ye call hours, and to
each hour ye assign its planet; and ye do the same thing with the night,
according to whether the days be long or short. Thus do the hours
become long or short. As for example, suppose that on a Sunday the Sun
riseth at 7 o'clock and setteth at 5 o'clock in the evening, its course will be
ten hours, the which ye divide up into twelve equal parts, so that each
hour is of fifty minutes' length. I say, therefore, that the first planetary hour
is of the Sun, and is fifty minutes long; that the second is of Venus; the
third of Mercury; and so on of the others; at last the eighth hour returneth
unto the Sun; the ninth unto Venus; the tenth unto Mercury; and so the
day finisheth. Then cometh the night, which is longer, that is to say,
fourteen hours, and each planetary hour of this night will be seventy
minutes, and in order to continue the regular succession as we have
79
begun, the first hour of the night will be of Jupiter; the second of Mars; the
third of the Sun; and so on until Monday, whose first hour will be
(according to this rule) of the Moon.
Now tell me, I pray you, doth it always happen that when the day of
Monday commenceth, that is to say, when the Sun riseth in its horizon,
that the Moon riseth also together with him, and that she setteth also
together with him? They cannot answer this. Wherefore then do they
apportion unto the second day of the week and unto its first hour the
Moon? They can tell you no reason, except a likeness to the name (of the
day).
O! how gross an error! Hear and tell me when it is that a planet hath the
greatest force in the elements; whether when it is above or when it is
below your horizon or hemisphere? We must however avow that it is
more powerful when it is above, because being below it hath no power
save according unto the will of God. Why then, even further than this,
should we attribute unto a planet a day and hour, if during the whole
period of such day it appeareth not above the horizon?
Abramelin as a most excellent master in natural things taught unto me a
very different form of classification (which also we'll examine, and see
whether it be not more surely founded than the aforesaid rule of the
astrologers), and made me to comprehend what should be the true
planetary hours. When the planet beginneth to appear upon the horizon
then doth its day begin (whether it be light or dark, black or white), and
until it hath passed its elevation its day lasteth until it riseth anew, and
after that it hath set its night endureth; so that as well in the days of the
Sun as in those of the Moon and of the others, the days of all the planets
be mingled, only that one commenceth sooner than another, according to
which nature they be mingled together in the celestial signs.
Now it is requisite that I should tell unto you what be the planetary hours!
Know then that each planet hath only an hour during the which it is very
powerful, being over you and above your head, that is to say when it is in
the meridian. Then, naturally, will sometimes arrive the hours of two
planets together and beginning at the same moment; they then produce
an effect according unto the nature, quality, and complexion of these
stars. But all this only hath power in natural things. Here have I declared
and proved unto you the errors of the (common) astrologers; keep
yourselves carefully from the insensate follies of their days and hours,
80
because if ye make use of these as do the false magicians and

enchanters, God will chastise you; and in order to chastise you will pay
but little attention unto the awaiting of the hour of Saturn or of Mars.
I therefore now conclude this chapter, having sufficiently treated of the
false and useless method employed by the astrologers in the election of
days and of hours.
81
THE SEVENTH CHAPTER

Regarding what it is necessary to accomplish during the
first two Moons1 of the beginning of this veritable and
Sacred Magic.
He who commenceth this operation should consider with care that which
we have before said, and should pay attention unto that which followeth;
and the thing being of importance, I shall leave alone for the present all
other considerations, so that we may begin with the operation which we
should perform on the first morning after the celebration of the feast of
Easter (or Passover).
Firstly: Having carefully washed one's whole body and having put on
fresh clothing: precisely a quarter of an hour before Sunrise ye shall enter
into your oratory, open the window, and place yourselves upon your
knees before the altar, turning your faces towards the window; and
devoutly and with boldness ye shall invoke the name of the Lord, thanking
him for all the grace which he hath given and granted unto you from your
infancy until now; then with humility shall ye humble yourselves unto him,
and confess unto him entirely all your sins; supplicating him to be willing
topardon you and remit them. Ye shall also supplicate him that in the time
to come he may be willing and pleased to regard you with pity and grant
you his grace and goodness to send unto you his holy angel, who shall
serve unto you as a guide, and lead you ever in his holy way and will; so
that ye fall not into sin through inadvertence, through ignorance, or
through human frailty.
In this manner shall ye commence your oration, and continue thus every
morning during the first two Moons or Months.
Meseemeth here that now some may say, "Wherefore dost thou not write
down the words or form of prayer the which I should employ, seeing that,
as for me, I am neither sufficiently learned, nor devout, nor wise?"
Know ye that although in the beginning your prayer be but feeble, it will
suffice, provided that ye understand how to demand the grace of the Lord
with love and a true heart, whence it must be that such a prayer cometh
forth. Also it serveth nothing to speak without devotion, without attention,
and without intelligence; nor yet to pronounce it with the mouth alone,
82
without a true intent; nor yet to read it as do the ignorant and the impious.
But it is absolutely necessary that your prayer should issue from the midst
of your heart, because simply setting down prayers in writing, the hearing
of them will in no way explain unto you how really to pray. This is the
reason that I have not wished to give unto you any special form of prayers
and orations, so that ye yourselves may learn from and of yourselves how
to pray, and how to invoke the holy name of God, our Lord; and for that
reason I have not been willing that ye should rely upon me in order to
pray. Ye have the holy and sacred scripture, the which is filled with very
beautiful and potent prayers and actions of grace. Study then herein, and
learn herefrom, and ye shall have no lack of instructions how to pray with
fruit. And although in the commencement your prayer may be weak, it
sufficeth that your heart be true and loyal towards God, who little by little
will kindle in you his holy spirit, who will so teach you and enlighten your
spirit, that ye shall both know and have the power to pray.
When ye shall have performed your orations, close the window, and go
forth from the oratory; so that no one may be able therein to enter; and ye
shall not yourselves enter again until the evening when the Sun shall be
set. Then shall ye enter therein afresh, and shall perform your prayers in
the same manner as in the morning.
For the rest, ye shall govern yourselves each day as I shall tell you in the
following instructions.
Concerning the bed chamber and the oratory, and how they should be
arranged, I will tell hereafter in the eleventh chapter.
It is requisite that ye shall have a bed chamber near the oratory or else
your ordinary habitation, which it is necessary first to thoroughly clean out
and perfume, and see that the bed be both new and clean. Your whole
attention must be given to purity in all things; because the Lord hath in
abomination all that is impure. You shall sleep in this said chamber, and
you shall continue therein during the day, there transacting the matters
which belong unto your business; and those which you can dispense with,
leave alone. You may sleep with your wife in the bed when she is pure
and clean; but when she hath her monthly courses you shall not allow her
to enter the bed, nor even the chamber. Every Sabbath eve it is
necessary to change the sheets of the bed, and all the linen. Every
Saturday you shall perfume the chamber. And ye shall not allow any dog,
cat, or other animal to enter into nor dwell therein; so that they may in no
83
way be able to render it unclean. As regardeth the matrimonial obligation,

it is chastity, and the duty that of engendering children; but the whole
should be done in the fear of God, and, above all things, in such case see
that your wife be not impure. But during the following four Moons ye shall
flee sexual intercourse as ye would the plague. Even if ye have children,
endeavour to send them away unto another place before (commencing
the operation), so that they may not be an hindrance from being about
you; except the eldest-born of the family, and infants at the breast.
As regardeth the regimen of your life and actions, ye shall have regard
unto your status and condition. If you be your own master, as far as lieth
in your power, free yourself from all your business, and quit all mundane
and vain company and conversation; leading a life tranquil, solitary, and
honest. If aforetime you have been a wicked, debauched, avaricious,
luxurious, and proud man, leave and flee from all these vices. Consider
that this was one of the principal reasons why Abraham, Moses, David,
Elijah, John, and other holy men retired into desert places, until that they
had acquired this holy science and magic; because where there are many
people, many scandals do arise; and where scandal is, sin cometh; the
which at length offendeth and driveth away the angel of God, and the way
which leadeth unto wisdom becometh closed unto ye. Fly as far as you
can the conversation of men, and especially of such as in the past have
been the companions of your debauches; or who have led you into sin.
Ye shall therefore seek retirement as far as possible; until that ye shall
have received that grace of the Lord which ye ask. But a domestic
servant who is compelled to serve a master cannot well have these
conveniences (for working and performing the operation).
Take well heed in treating of business, in selling or buying, that it shall be
requisite that you never give way unto anger, but be modest and patient
in your actions.
You shall set apart two hours each day after having dined, during the
which you shall read with care the Holy Scripture and other holy books,
because they will teach you to be good at praying, and how to fear the
Lord; and thus day by day shall ye better know your Creator. The other
exercises which be free and permitted unto you, are hereafter set forth
and principally in the eleventh chapter.
As for eating, drinking, and sleeping, such should be in moderation and
never superfluous. It is especially necessary to shun drunkenness, and
84
flee public dinners. Content yourself with eating at your own house, with
your family, in the peace and quiet which God hath granted unto you. You
should never sleep during the day, but you may in the morning, for after
that you have performed your devotions you may if you wish again go to
bed to rest yourself. And if it happeneth by chance that you do not rise
sufficiently early, that is to say before sunrise, it doth not greatly matter
(provided that it be not done of evil intent), and you shall perform your
ordinary morning prayer; but you should not accustom yourself to be
slothful, it being always better to pray unto God at an early hour.
Concerning clothing and family.

Your dress should be clean but moderate, and according to custom. Flee
all vanity. You shall have two dresses, in order that you may be able to
change them; and you shall change them the eve of each Sabbath,
wearing the one one week, and the other the next; brushing and
perfuming them always beforehand.
As for that which regardeth the family, the fewer in number, the better;
also act so that the servants may be modest and tranquil. All these pieces
of advice be principal points which it is well to observe. As for the rest,
you have only to keep before your eyes the Tables of the Law during all
this time, and also afterwards; because these Tables should be the rule of
your life.
Let your hand be ever ready to give alms and other benefits to your
neighbour; and let your heart be ever open unto the poor, whom God so
loveth that one cannot express the same.
And in the case that during this period you should be attacked by some
illness, which would not permit you to go unto the oratory, this need not
oblige you to abandon your enterprise at once; but you should govern
yourself to the best of your ability; and in such case you shall perform
your orations in your bed, entreating God to restore you to health, so that
youmay be enabled to continue your undertaking, and make the sacrifices
which be due, and so with the greater strength be able to work to obtain
his wisdom.
And this is all that we should do and observe during these two Moons.
85
THE EIGHTH CHAPTER

Concerning the two second Moons.
The two first Moons being finished; the two second Moons follow, during
the which ye shall make your prayer, morning and evening at the hour
accustomed; but before entering into the oratory ye shall wash your
hands and face thoroughly with pure water. And you shall prolong your
prayer with the greatest possible affection, devotion, and submission;
humbly entreating the Lord God that he would deign to command his holy
angels to lead you in the true way, and wisdom, and knowledge, by
studying the which assiduously in the sacred writings there will arise more
and more (wisdom) in your heart.
The use of the rights of marriage is permitted, but should scarcely if at all
be made use of (during this period).
You shall also wash your whole body every Sabbath eve.
As to what regardeth commerce and manner of living, I have already
given unto you sufficient instruction.
Only it is absolutely necessary to retire from the world and seek retreat;
and ye shall lengthen your prayers to the utmost of your ability.
As for eating, drinking, and clothing, ye shall govern yourselves in exactly
the same manner as in the two first Moons; except that ye shall fast (the
Qabalistical fast) every Sabbath eve.
Note well: The Sabbath is for the Jews, who are accustomed to observe
the same every Saturday, but for Christians the Sabbath is the Sunday,
and they ought to consider the Saturday as its eve.
86
THE NINTH CHAPTER

Concerning the two last Moons which must be thus
commenced.
Morning and Noon ye shall wash your hands and your face on entering
the oratory; and firstly ye shall make confession of all your sins; after this,
with a very ardent prayer, ye shall entreat the Lord to accord unto you this
particular grace, which is, that you may enjoy and be able to endure the
presence and conversation of his holy angels, and that he may deign by
their intermission to grant unto you the secret wisdom, so that you may be
able to have dominion over the spirits and over all creatures.
Ye shall do this same at midday before dining, and also in the evening; so
that during these two last Moons ye shall perform the prayer three times a
day, and during this time ye shall ever keep the perfume upon the altar.
Also towards the end of your oration, ye shall pray unto the holy angels,
supplicating them to bear your sacrifice before the face of God, in order to
intercede for you, and that they shall assist you in all your operations
during these two Moons.
The man who is his own master shall leave all business alone, except
works of charity towards his neighbour. You shall shun all society except
that of your wife and of your servants. Ye shall employ the greatest part of
your time in speaking of the law of God, and in reading such works as
treat wisely thereof; so that your eyes may be opened unto that which
from past time even unto the present ye have not as yet seen, nor
thought of, nor believed.
Every Sabbath eve shall ye fast, and wash your whole body, and change
your garment.
Furthermore, ye shall have a vest and tunic of linen, which ye shall put on
every time that ye enter into the oratory, before ye commence to put the
perfume in the censer, as I shall tell ye more fully hereafter.
Also ye shall have a basket or other convenient vessel of copper filled
with charcoal to put inside the censer when necessary, and which ye can
takeoutside the oratory, because the censer itself should never be taken
away from the place. Note well that after having performed your prayer,
87
you ought to take it out of the oratory, especially during the two last
Moons, and ye should inter it in a place which cannot well be made
unclean, such as a garden.
88
THE TENTH CHAPTER

Concerning what things a man may learn and study during
these two Moons.
Although the best counsel which I can give is that a man should go into
retirement in some desert or solitude, until the time of the six Moons
destined unto this operation be fulfilled, and that he shall have obtained
that which he wisheth; as the ancients used to do; nevertheless now this
is hardly possible; and we must accommodate ourselves unto the era (in
which we live); and being unable to carry it out in one way, we should
endeavour to do so in another; and attach ourselves only unto divine
things.
But there be certain who cannot even do this thoroughly, notwithstanding
they may honestly wish the same; and this because of their divers
employments and positions which will not permit them to act in
accordance with their desires, so that they are compelled to carry on their
worldly occupations.
In order then that such may know what occupations and business they
can follow out without prejudice to this operation, I will here state the
same in few words.
We may then exercise the profession of medicine, and all arts connected
with the same; and we may perform all operations which tend unto charity
and mercy towards our neighbour purely and simply. As for what
concerneth the liberal arts ye may interest yourselves in astronomy, etc.,
but flee all arts and operations which have the least tincture of magic and
sorcery, seeing that we must not confound together God and Belial: God
wisheth to be alone; unto him pertain all honour and glory. All the above
matters are however permitted during the two first and the two second
Moons.
You may walk in a garden for recreation; but you shall do no servile work;
and amidst the flowers and the fruits you can also meditate upon the
greatness of God. But during the two third and last Moons ye shall quit
every other matter only permitting your recreation to consist in things
spiritual and divine. If ye wish to be participators in the conversation of the
angels, and in the divine wisdom, lay aside all indiscreet things, and
89
regard it as a pleasure when ye can spare two or three hours to study the
holy scripture, because hencefrom ye shall derive incredible profit; and
even the less ye are learned, so much the more will ye become wise and
clever. It sufficeth that in the performance of your orisons ye shall not give
way unto sleep, and that ye shall fail in nowise in this operation through
negligence and voluntarily.
90

Concerning the selection of the place.
We should make the selection of the place (for the operation) before
commencing it, and prior to the celebration of the Passover, in order that
we may decide upon the same without hindrance, and it is necessary that
all things should be prepared.
He who commenceth this operation in solitude can elect a place
according unto his pleasure; where there is a small wood, in the midst of
which you shall make a small altar, and you shall cover the same with a
hut (or shelter) of fine branches, so that the rain may not fall thereon and
extinguish the lamp and the censer. Around the altar at the distance of
seven paces you shall prepare a hedge of flowers, plants, and green
shrubs, so that it may divide the entrance into two parts; that is to say, the
interior where the altar and tabernacle will be placed after the manner of a
temple; and the part exterior, which with the rest of the place will be as a
portico thereunto.
Now if you commence not this operation in the country, but perform it in a
town, or in some dwelling place, I will show unto ye what shall be
necessary herein.
Ye shall choose an apartment which hath a window, joined unto the which
shall be an uncovered terrace (or balcony), and a lodge (or small room or
hut) covered with a roof, but so that there may be on every side windows
whence you may be able to see in every direction, and whence you may
enter into the oratory. In the which place the evil spirits shall be able to
appear, since they cannot appear within the oratory itself. In the which
place, beside the oratory towards the quarter of the North, you shall have
a rooted or covered lodge, in the which and from whence one may be
able to see the oratory. I myself also had two large windows made in my
oratory, and at the time of the convocation of the spirits, I used to open
them and remove both the shutters and the door, so that I could easily
see on every side and constrain them to obey me.
The oratory should always be clear and clean swept, and the flooring
should be of wood, of white pine; in fine, this place should be so well and
carefully prepared, that one may judge it to be a place destined unto
prayer.
91
The terrace and the contiguous lodge where we are to invoke the spirits
we should cover with river sand to the depth of two fingers at the least.
The altar should be erected in the midst of the oratory; and if anyone
maketh his oratory in desert places, he should build it of stones which
have never been worked or hewn, or even touched by the hammer.
The chamber should be boarded with pine wood, and a lamp full of oil
olive should be suspended therein, the which every time that ye shall
have burned your perfume and finished your orison, ye shall extinguish. A
handsome censer of bronze, or of silver if one hath the means, must be
placed upon the altar, the which should in no wise be removed from its
place until the operation be finished, if one performeth it in a dwelling
house; for in the open country one cannot do this. Thus in this point as in
all the others, we should rule and govern ourselves according unto the
means at our disposal.
The altar, which should be made of wood, ought to be hollow within after
the manner of a cupboard, wherein you shall keep all the necessary
things, such as the two robes, the crown or mitre, the wand, the holy oils,
the girdle or belt, the perfume; and any other things which may be
necessary.
The second habiliments will be a shirt or tunic of linen, large and white,
with well and properly made sleeves. The other robe will be of crimson or
scarlet silk with gold, and it should not be longer than just unto the knees,
with sleeves of similar stuff. As for these vestments, there is no particular
rule for them; nor any especial instructions to be followed; but the more
resplendent, clean, and brilliant they are the better will it be. You shall
also make a girdle of silk of the same colour as the tunic, wherewithal you
shall be girded. You shall have upon your head a beautiful crown or
woven fillet of silk and gold.
.
You shall prepare the sacred oil in this manner: Take of myrrh in tears,
one part; of fine cinnamon, two parts; of galangal half a part; and the half
of the total weight of these drugs of the best oil olive. The which
aromatics you shall mix together according unto the art of the apothecary,
and shall make thereof a balsam, the which you shall keep in a glass vial
which you shall put within the cupboard (formed by the interior) of the
altar.
92
The perfume shall be made thus: Take of incense in tears one part; of
stacte half a part; of lign aloes a quarter of a part; and not being able to
get this wood you shall take that of cedar, or of rose, or of citron, or any
other odoriferous wood. You shall reduce all these ingredients into a very
fine powder, mix them well together and keep the same in a box or other
convenient vessel. As you will consume a great deal of this perfume, it
will be advisable to mix enough on the eve of the Sabbath to last the
whole week.
You shall also have a wand of almond-tree wood, smooth and straight, of
the length of about from half an ell to six feet. And ye shall keep the
aforesaid things in good order in the cupboard of the altar, ready for use
in the proper time and place.
Here followeth the manner of ordering oneself and of operating.
93
THE TWELFTH CHAPTER

How one should keep oneself in order to carry out this
operation well.
This operation being truly divine, it is necessary once more to treat of and
distinguish the present consecration into different periods of time.
You shall then understand that during the two first and two second
Moons, no other consecration must be performed, than that of which we
have already spoken in the seventh and eighth foregoing chapters, unto
the which I refer you, so as not to be too prolix. And I only say unto you,
that during the course of the two first and two second Moons, every
Saturday when ye perform the orison, ye shall also burn the perfume as
well in the morning as in the evening; and in the two third and last Moons
ye shall make the prayer and the perfume thrice daily.
Now here hath the last part of the time arrived; here therefore open ye
your eyes and be attentive, and govern yourselves in everything and
every place in the way which I have written unto you. Have confidence in
God, because if even until then ye have faithfully observed mine
instructions which I have given unto you, and if your orisons shall have
been made with a righteous heart and with devotion, there is no manner
of doubt that all things will appear easy unto you, and your own spirit and
your understanding will teach you the manner in which you should
conduct yourself in all points; because your guardian angel is already
about you, though invisible, and conducteth and governeth your heart, so
that you shall not err. The two Moons being finished, in the morning ye
shall commence all that is commanded in the ninth chapter and further
observe this present chapter.
When first ye shall enter into the oratory, leave your shoes without, and
having opened the window, ye shall place the lighted coals in the censer
which you shall have brought with you, you shall light the lamp, and take
from the cupboard of the altar your two vestments, the crown, the girdle,
and the wand, placing them upon the altar. Then take the sacred oil in
your left hand, cast some of the perfume upon the fire, and place yourself
upon your knees, praying unto the Lord with fervour.
94
The Orison.
"O Lord God of mercy; God, patient, most benign and liberal; who
grantest thy grace in a thousand ways, and unto a thousand
generations; who forgettest the iniquities, the sins, and the
transgressions of men; in whose presence none is found
innocent; who visitest the transgressions of the father upon the
children and nephews unto the third and fourth generation; I know
my wretchedness, and that I am not worthy to appear before thy
divine majesty, nor even to implore and beseech thy goodness
and mercy for the least grace. But, O Lord of Lords, the source of
thy bounty is so great, that of itself it calleth those who are
ashamed by reason of their sins and dare not approach, and
inviteth them to drink of thy grace. Wherefore, O Lord my God,
have pity upon me, and take away from me all iniquity and malice;
cleanse my soul from all the uncleanness of sin; renew within me
my spirit, and comfort it, so that it may become strong and able to
comprehend the mystery of thy grace, and the treasures of thy
divine wisdom. Sanctify me also with the oil of thy sanctification,
wherewith thou hast sanctified all thy prophets; and purify in me
therewith all that appertaineth unto me, so that I may become
worthy of the conversation of thy holy angels and of thy divine
wisdom, and grant unto me the power which thou hast given unto
thy prophets over all the evil spirits. Amen. Amen."
This is the prayer which I myself made use of in my consecration; the
which I give not here to confine you (to a certain form), nor to oblige you
to employ the same, nor to tell it you over as I would to a parrot whom I
should wish to teach to talk; but only and solely to give unto you an idea
of the manner in which we should pray.
Having finished your orison, rise from your knees, and anoint the centre
of your forehead with a little of the sacred oil; after this dip your finger into
the same oil, and anoint therewith the four upper corners of the altar.
Touch also with this holy oil the vestments, the girdle, the crown, and the
wand, on both sides. You shall also touch the doors and the windows of
the oratory. Then with your finger dipped in the oil you shall write upon
the four sides of the altar these words, so that they may be perfectly
clearly written on each side:
95
"In whatever place it may be wherein commemoration of my name shall

be made, I will come unto you and I will bless you."
This being done the consecration is finished, and then ye shall put the
white tunic and all the other things into the cupboard of the altar. Then
kneel down and make your ordinary prayer, as is laid down in the third
chapter and be well ware to take no consecrated thing out of the oratory;
and during the whole of the ensuing period ye shall enter the oratory and
celebrate the office with naked feet.
96
THE THIRTEENTH CHAPTER

Concerning the convocation of the good spirits.
We are now arrived at a point at which ye shall be able to see clearly,
having duly followed out and observed the instructions which I have given
unto you, and having during all this time served God your creator with a
perfect heart. We are now arrived at the term, wherefore the following
morning rise betimes, neither wash yourselves at all nor dress yourselves
at all in your ordinary clothes; but take a robe of mourning; enter the
oratory with bare feet; go unto the side of the censer, take the ashes
therefrom and place them upon your head; light the lamp; and put the hot
coals into the censer; and having opened the windows, return unto the
door. There prostrate yourself with your face against the ground, and
order the child to put the perfume upon the censer, after which he is to
place himself upon his knees before the altar; following in all things and
throughout the instructions which I have given unto you in the last chapter
of the first book, to which I am here referring. Humiliate yourself before
God and his celestial court, and commence your prayer with fervour, for
then it is that you will begin to enflame yourself in praying, and you will
see appear an extraordinary and supernatural splendour which will fill the
whole apartment, and will surround you with an inexpressible odour, and
this alone will console you and comfort your heart so that you shall call
forever happy the Day of the Lord. Also the child will experience an
admirable feeling of contentment in the presence of the angel. And you
shall continue always your prayer redoubling your ardour and fervour, and
shall pray the holy angel that he may deign to sign, and write upon a
small square plate of silver (which you shall have had made for this
purpose and which you shall have placed upon the altar) another sign if
you shall have need of it in order to see him; and everything which you
are to do. As soon as the angel shall have made the sign by writing, and
that he shall have written down some other counsel which may be
necessary unto you, he will disappear, but the splendour will remain. The
which the child having observed, and made the sign thereof unto you, you
shall command him to bring you quickly the little plate of silver, and that
which you find written thereon you shall at once copy, and order the child
to replace it upon the altar. Then you shall go forth from the oratory and
leave the window open, and the lamp alight, and during this whole day
you shall not enter into the oratory; but shall make preparation for the day
following; and during the day you shall speak to none, nor make answer,
even were it your own wife or children or servants; except to the child
97
whom you can send away. Also you shall beforehand have set your
affairs in order, and so arranged them that no embarrassment may be
caused you thereby, which might distract your attention. In the evening
when the Sun shall be set, you shall eat but soberly; and then you shall
go to rest alone; and you shall live separated from your wife during these
days.
During seven days shall you perform the ceremonies without failing
therein in any way; namely, the day of the consecration, the three days of
the convocation of the good and holy spirits, and the three other days of
the convocation of the evil spirits.
Now the second morning after, you are to be prepared to follow the
counsel which the angel will have given you. You will go early unto the
oratory, you will place the lighted charcoal and perfumes in the censer,
you are to relight the lamp if it be (by that time) extinguished; and wearing
the same robe of mourning as of the day before, prostrate with your face
towards the ground, you shall humbly pray unto and supplicate the Lord
that he may have pity on you, and that he may deign to fulfil your prayer;
that he will grant unto you the vision of his holy angels, and that the elect
spirits may deign to grant unto you their familiar converse. And thus shall
ye pray unto the utmost degree that shall be possible unto you, and with
the greatest fervour that you can bring into action from your heart, and
this during the space of two or three hours. Then quit the oratory,
returning thither at midday for another hour, and equally again in the
evening; then you shall eat after the manner aforesaid, and go to rest.
Understand also that the odour and the splendour will in nowise quit the
oratory.
The third day being now arrived, you shall act thus. The evening (before)
you shall wash your whole body thoroughly; and in the morning, being
dressed in your ordinary garments, you shall enter into the oratory, but
with naked feet. Having placed the fire and the perfumes in the censer,
and lighted the lamp, you shall put on the white vestment, and place
yourself on your knees before the altar, to render thanks to God for all his
benefits, and firstly for having granted unto you a treasure so great and
so precious. You shall render thanks also unto the holy guardian angels,
praying unto them that henceforward they will have you in their care for
the whole period of your life; also that he will never abandon you, that he
will lead you in the way of the Lord, and that he will watch carefully over
you to assist you, and consent unto the present operation of the Sacred
98
Magic, so that you shall have such force and virtue that you may be able
to constrain the spirits accursed of God, unto the honour of your creator,
and for your own good and that of your neighbour. And then shall you first
be able to put to the test whether you shall have well employed the period
of your six Moons, and how well and worthily you shall have laboured in
the quest of the wisdom of the Lord; since you shall see your guardian
angel appear unto you in unequalled beauty; who also will converse with
you, and speak in words so full of affection and of goodness, and with
such sweetness, that no human tongue could express the same. He will
animate you unto your great content in the fear of God, making you a
recital of the blessings which you have received from God; and bringing
unto your remembrance the sins by which you have offended him during
the whole period of your life, will instruct you and give unto you the
manner in which you shall be able to appease him by a pure, devout,
and regulated life, and by honest and meritorious actions, and such things
as God shall ordain unto you. After this he will show unto you the true
wisdom and holy magic, and also wherein you have erred in your
operation, and how thenceforward you should proceed in order to
overcome the evil spirits, and finally arrive at your desired ends. He will
promise never to abandon you, but to defend and assist you during the
whole period of your life; on condition that you shall obey his commands,
and that you shall not voluntarily offend your creator. In one word, you
shall be received by him with such affection that this description which I
here give unto you shall appear a mere nothing in comparison.
Now at this point I commence to restrict myself in my writing, seeing that
by the grace of the Lord I have submitted and consigned you unto a
master so great that he will never let you err.
Observe that on the third day you should remain in familiar conversation
with your guardian angel. You should quit the oratory for a short time in
the afternoon, remaining without about an hour; then for the rest of the
day you shall remain therein, receiving from the holy angel distinct and
ample information regarding the evil spirits and the manner of bringing
them into submission, carefully writing down and taking notes of all these
matters.
Now, the Sun being set, you shall perform the evening orison with the
ordinary perfume, giving thanks unto God in particular for the very great
grace that he hath granted unto you in that day, there also supplicating
him to be propitious unto you and to aid you during your whole life, so that
99
you shall never be able to offend him. You shall also render thanks unto
your guardian angel and beseech him not to abandon you.
The prayer being finished you will see that the splendour will disappear.
Then shall you quit the oratory, closing the door, but leaving the windows
open and the lamp alight. You shall return as on the preceding days unto
your apartment where you shall modestly recreate yourself, and eat your
necessary food, then you shall go to rest until the following morning.
100
THE FOURTEENTH CHAPTER

Concerning the convocation of the spirits.
Though the following advice may be scarcely necessary for the most part,
since I have already explained unto you all things necessary to be done;
and also seeing that your guardian angel will have sufficiently instructed
you in all that you should do; yet nevertheless I will here declare plainly
certain matters unto you, with the idea rather of making the account of the
operation complete in this book, and also to give you every opportunity of
possessing the matter thoroughly through reading these things many
times; so that having received the vision of the angel, you may find
yourself thoroughly instructed in all the essential points.
Having then reposed yourself during the night, you shall rise in the
morning before dawn, and shall enter into the oratory; and having placed
the lighted charcoal in the censer, light the lamp also. You shall then robe
yourself, taking first the white vestment, and over this you shall put on
that3 of silk and gold, then the girdle, and upon your head you shall place
the crown, and you shall lay the wand upon the altar. Then, having put
the perfume in the censer you shall fall upon your knees, and pray unto
almighty God to grant you the grace to finish your operation unto the
praise and glory of his holy name, and for your own use and that of your
neighbour. Also you shall supplicate your guardian angel to aid you, and
to govern your heart with his counsel, and all your senses. After this you
shall take the wand in your right hand, and pray unto God to give unto this
wand as much virtue, force, and power as he gave unto those of Moses,
of Aaron, of Elijah, and of the other prophets whose number is infinite.
Now place yourself beside the altar looking towards the door and the
open terrace; or if you be in the country place yourself at the western
side, and commence by summoning the chief spirits and princes.
But your angel will already have instructed you how to convoke them, and
will have sufficiently impressed it on your heart.
And as well in this as in the orison, we should never proceed and act by
the mouth only or by written conjurations alone; but with a free heart and
intrepid courage; because it is certain that there is more difficulty in
convoking the evil spirits5 than the good, which latter usually appear more
readily when they are first called if it be by persons of good intent; while
the evil spirits flee as much as possible all occasion of submitting
themselves to man. This is wherefore he who wisheth to constrain them
101
should be upon his guard, and follow out faithfully from point to point the
instructions which his guardian angel will have given him, and that he
impresseth them well upon his memory following them from point to point;
seeing that while no spirit good or evil can know the secrets of your heart
before you yourself bring the same to light, unless God who alone
knoweth all things should manifest them; they (the spirits) nevertheless
can penetrate into and understand that which you are thinking by means
of your actions and your words. This is the reason why he who wisheth
properly to convoke and conjure the spirits, should first well consider the
following conjuration; and afterward perform it with feeling and freely by
heart; and not by writing, because in using that composed by others, the
spirits thence judge that we ourselves are ignorant, and render
themselves straightway more intractable and stubborn. The evil spirits be
about you, though invisible, and they keenly examine whether he who
conjureth them is courageous or timid, whether he is prudent, and
whether he hath a true faith in God who can perform all things with ease.
We can constrain them (the spirits), and force them to appear; but a few
words ill pronounced by an ill-intentioned person only produce an effect
against the person himself who ignorantly pronounceth them; and an
individual of such a character should in no way undertake this operation,
for such would be the true way to make a mock of God and to tempt him.
Of the conjurations.
I have many times repeated unto you that the fear of God is the principal
subject of the instruction of your guardian angel, against which you
should never commit any fault, even if it be but slight.
Firstly: You should perform the conjuration in your mother tongue, or in a
language that you well understand, and conjure the spirits by the authority
of and their obedience to the holy patriarchs, rehearsing unto them
examples of their ruin and fall, of the sentence which God hath
pronounced against them, and of their obligation unto servitude; and how
on one side and on another they have been vanquished by the good
angels and by wise men; all which points you will have had plenty of
opportunity to study in the sacred writings during the six Moons (of
preparation). Also you shall menace them, in case they are unwilling to
obey, with calling unto your aid the power of the holy angels over them.
Your guardian angel will also have instructed you to perform this
convocation with modesty, and in no wise to be timid, but courageous, yet
in moderation, however, without too overbearing hardiness and bravery.
102
And in case of their being inclined to resist, and unwilling to obey you, you
must not on that account give way to anger, because thus you will only do
injury to yourself; and they will ask nothing better, it being exactly what
they would be endeavouring to do; but (on the contrary) with an intrepid
heart, and putting your whole trust in God, with a tranquil heart you shall
exhort them to yield, letting them see that you have put all your
confidence in the living and only God, reminding them how powerful and
potent he is; thus, therefore, govern yourself, using prudence towards
them.
And communicate unto them also the form in the which you wish them to
appear; the which you cannot determine, nor even themselves, but you
ought the evening before to have demanded this from your guardian
angel, who knoweth better than you your nature and constitution, and
who understandeth the forms which can terrify you, and those of which
you can support the sight.
.
And you must not think that this can be done otherwise, as certain
accursed persons write; that is to say, by means of seals, and
conjurations, and superstitious figures, and pentacles, and other
abominations, written by diabolical enchanters; for this would be the coin
wherewith the hideous Satan would buy you for his slave.
But let your whole trust be in the arm, the power, and the force of God
Almighty; then shall you be in all safety, and the guard of your angel will
defend you from all dangers. This is why you should have good courage,
and have confidence that no adversity can happen unto you. Observing
then the doctrine that your angel will have given unto you, and
persevering in placing all your trust in God, at length they will appear in
the form commanded upon the terrace, upon the sand; when, according
to the advice and doctrine received from your holy angel, and as I will
clearly teach you in the following chapter, you shall propound your
demand, and you shall receive from them their oath.
The spirits which we should convoke on the first day are the four superior
princes, whose names will be written in the nineteenth chapter, and this is
the conjuration of the first day.
103
The conjuration of the second day.

On the following day, having performed the ordinary orison, and the
aforesaid ceremonies, you shall briefly repeat the aforesaid conjuration
unto the said spirits, bringing to their remembrance their promises and
oaths made on the preceding day to send unto you the eight sub-princes;
and address the conjuration unto all the twelve together, and in a little
while they will appear visibly, the eight sub-princes in the form which hath
been commanded them; and they will promise and swear unto you
(allegiance), as will be more fully shown in the following chapter.
The conjuration of the third day.
The conjuration of the third day is the same as that of the second day,
seeing that we are then to remind the eight sub-princes of their promises
and oaths (of allegiance); and we are to call and convoke them with all
their adherents, and then they do appear once more in visible forms, the
whole particular cohorts of each will appear also invisibly, surrounding the
eight sub-princes. But while invoking God your Lord for strength and
surety, and your holy angel for counsel and assistance, never forget what
the latter will have taught you, for it is a necessary point.
Here followeth the fifteenth chapter which teacheth what we should
demand from the spirits, who are divided into three classes.
104
THE FIFTEENTH CHAPTER

Concerning what you should demand of the spirits who
are divided into three different troops and convoked on
three separate days.
The demands we should make to the spirits are of three different kinds.
The first demand.
The demand of the first day when the four superior princes shall have
visibly appeared, you shall make according unto the order of the angel:
Firstly: The proposition by what virtue, power, and authority you make
your demands unto them; that is to say by the virtue of God our Lord who
hath made them subject unto all his creatures, and brought them to your
feet.
Secondly: That your object is not at all a malign curiosity, but (one
tending) unto the honour and glory of God, and to your own good and that
of all the human race. That further, every time that you shall summon
them, by whatever sign or word, and in whatever time and place, and for
whatever occasion and service, they shall have to appear immediately
without any delay, and obey your commands. And that in case they shall
have some legitimate hindrance hereto, they are to send unto you some
other spirits assigning then and there such as shall be capable and potent
to accomplish and obey your will and your demand in their place. And that
they shall promise and swear to observe this by the most rigorous
judgment of God, and by the most severe punishment and chastisement
of the holy angels, inflicted upon them. And that they will consent to obey,
and that the four sovereign princes will name unto you the eight
subprinces, whom they will send in their place to take the oath as I have
already said, to appear at once on the following morning when
commanded by you; and that they will duly send the eight sub-princes.
For greater certainty, quit the altar now, and go towards the door which
openeth onto the terrace, advancing your right hand beyond. Make each
one of them touch the wand, and take the oath upon that wand.
105
The demand of the second day.

The eight sub-princes being invoked, you shall make unto them the same
demand and the same admonition which you have (already) made unto
the four sovereign princes. And further you shall request from these four,
that is to say, from Oriens, Paimon, Ariton, and Amaimon; that each of
them shall assign and consign unto you your familiar spirit, which from the
day of your birth they are compelled to give unto you. These will be given
and furnished unto you with their dependants and will afterwards obey
you. It is for you to demand from these the other spirits which you may
wish to have; but seeing that they be infinite in number, and one more
skilful in service than another, one for one matter, another for another;
you shall make a selection of the spirits whom you wish, and you shall put
outside upon the terrace a written list of their names for the eight
subprinces (to see), and you shall require from these (latter) the oath, as
you did from the four superior princes, that the following morning they
shall have to appear before you together with all the spirits whose names
you shall have given in writing, and also your familiar spirits.
The demand of the third day.
The eight sub-princes having presented all the spirits as you have
directed them, you shall command that Astarot with all his following shall
appear visibly in the form which the angel shall have prescribed unto you;
and immediately you shall see a great army, and all under the same form.
You shall propound unto them the same demand, which you have already
made unto the princes, and you shall cause them to take oath to observe
the same; that is to say, that every time that you shall call one of them by
his name, that he shall at once appear in such form and place as shall
please you, and that he shall punctually execute that which you shall
have commanded him. All having sworn, you shall put outside the entry of
the door, all the signs of the third book which belong unto Astarot, alone,
and make him swear thereon, also ordaining unto the7 that in cases when
it may not seem fit unto you to command them verbally, that as soon as
you shall take one of these signs in your hand and move it from its place
that the spirit marked in the sign shall do and execute that which the sign
beareth, and that which your intimation joined thereto shall indicate; also
that in the case that in the sign none of them shall be specially named,
that all in general shall be obliged promptly and readily to perform the
operation commanded; and that if also in the time to come, other (signs
or) symbols be made by you which be not here included, that then also
106
they (the spirits under Astarot) shall be equally bound to observe and
execute them also. And when the oath hath been taken, cause the prince
in the name of the rest to touch the wand.
After this, remove those symbols from the doorway; and call Magot, and
after him Asmodee, and lastly Belzebud; and act with all these as you
have done with Astarot; and all their symbols having been sworn unto, put
them aside in order in a certain place, so arranged that you can easily
distinguish one from another, as regards the subject, operation, or effect,
for which they have been made, and unto which they belong.
This being done, you shall call Astarot and Asmodee together, with their
common servitors, and shall propound unto them their symbols; and
having made them swear in the forementioned manner, you shall call in
similar fashion Asmodee and Magot, with their servitors, and shall make
them take oath upon their signs in the aforesaid manner.
And thus shall you observe this method with the four other sub-princes;
but first of all convoke them with their common servitors, and make them
swear upon the common signs, then Amaimon and Ariton together, and
finally each one apart, as in the first case.
And when you have put back all the symbols into their proper place,
request from each of these last four your familiar spirit, and make them
repeat its name, which you shall at once write down, together with the
time during which they shall be obliged to serve you. Then you shall
propound unto them the signs of the fifth chapter of the third book; and
shall make them not only swear upon these symbols (collectively), but
also each one (separately), that from this time forward he will observe
duly and with diligence the six hours destined; and you shall cause them
to promise toserve you with fidelity, performing all which they are obliged
to do, and that you shall command their (services); and that they shall not
in the slightest degree be false and lying as regardeth you; also, that if by
chance you should assign over one of them unto another person, that he
shall act as faithfully by him as by yourself; and, lastly, that they are to
fulfil, perform, and execute, that which God for their chastisement hath
destined unto them for sentence (of judgment).
You shall then observe this form with all the princes, and until all the
symbols shall be sworn to, with the four familiar spirits and the others
dominating (them).
107
THE SIXTEENTH CHAPTER

Concerning the sending them away.
Concerning the sending away of the spirits as well during the three days,
as hereafter:
It is not necessary to observe many ceremonies in order to send away the
spirits, because they themselves are only too glad to be far away from
you. This is wherefore you need not otherwise license them to depart;
that is to say that during the three days, having finished speaking with the
four sovereign princes, and afterwards with the eight sub-princes, and
received their oath (of allegiance), you shall say unto them that for the
present they can go unto their destined place; and that every time that
they shall be summoned, let them remember their oath made upon the
symbols.
(And you shall send away) the familiar spirits and all other spirits with the
aforesaid words.
It is true, however, that as regardeth the familiar spirits you shall tell them
that at the time when they are on guard-duty they shall remain near you
visible or invisible, in whatever form shall please you, in order to serve
you during the destined six hours.
108
THE SEVENTEENTH CHAPTER

What we should answer unto the interrogations of the spirits, and how we
should resist their demands.
The wicked Devil knoweth full well that you are in no way obliged unto
him, and that you have commenced this operation under the grace and
mercy of God, and under the protection and defence of the holy angels;
nevertheless, he will not fail to try his fortune, and he will seek to turn you
aside from the veritable path; but be you constant and courageous, and
swerve not in any way, either to the right hand or to the left. If he showeth
himself proud with you, render unto him the like, and in your turn show
him your pride. If he be humble, be in no wise too rude and severe toward
him, but be moderate in all things. If he asketh you some matter, you shall
make answer unto him according to the instruction which the guardian
angel shall have given you; and understand that the four princes more
than all the rest, will powerfully tempt you, saying unto you, "Who is he
who hath given thee so great authority?"
They will reproach you with your hardihood and presumption in
summoning them, knowing how powerful they are, and contrariwise, how
weak and sinful you yourself are. They will reproach you with your sins,
and will especially seek to dispute with you concerning your religion and
your faith in God: if you be a Jew they will tell you that your faith and your
religion have been refuted by God himself, and that you observe not the
true law as it should be (observed): also if you be a pagan they will say,
"What hath God to do with you or his creatures either, seeing that you
know not God?"
If you be a Christian they will say unto you, "What business is it of yours
to have to do with Hebrew ceremonies which are tainted with idolatry, and
the like?"
But let none of this disquiet you in the least; answer them in few words,
and laughingly, that it is none of their business to discuss these matters
with you, and to deliver their opinions concerning them; and that although
you may be a worthless wretch and a great sinner, you will yet hope that
the true and only God, who hath created the Heaven and the Earth, and
who hath condemned them and brought them into submission under your
feet, will forgive you your sins, both now and in future, whatever may be
the religion which you profess. (Further that) you wish to know,
109
understand, confess, and honour no other than the great and only God,
the Lord of light, by whose power, virtue, and authority you command
them to obey you.
When you shall have spoken unto them thus, then will they sing another
song, telling you that if you wish them to serve and to be obedient unto
you, that you must first come to terms with them. Then shall you answer
them on this wise:
"God our Lord hath condemned and sentenced you to serve me, and I do
not treat as an equal with those who are accustomed to obey".
Then will they demand of you some sacrifice or courtesy if you wish to be
served and obeyed promptly. You shall reply that sacrifice is not to be
made unto them, but rather unto the only God.
They will then entreat you not to hinder or bring to shame by means of
this wisdom any of their devotees and enchanters in their operations and
enchantments. You shall then make answer that you are obliged to
pursue the enemies of God and the Lord, and to repress their malice, and
also to save and defend your neighbour, and any who are offended and
hurt by them.
Then with much verbiage, and an infinitude of different ways will they
make severe attacks upon you, and even the familiar spirits will rise up
against you in their turn. These latter will demand and beseech of you
that you will in no way give them over unto others (to serve them). Hold
firm, however, and promise nothing either to one class (of spirits) or
another; but reply to them that every true and brave man is obliged to aid
and serve his friends to the best of his ability, and with all his
possessions, among the which they must assuredly also be comprised.
When at length they see that they have lost all hope of making you
prevaricate, and that they can obtain nothing notwithstanding all their
requests; they will definitely surrender, and will ask nothing else of you
unless it be that you shall not be too rude and insulting in commanding
them. You shall make answer to this, that if they prove themselves to be
obedient and prompt in serving you, that it may be that your angel, by
whose instruction and command you are governing yourself, may instruct
you not to be so rigid and severe with them if they shall obey, and that in
such case you will act as may be right.
110
THE EIGHTEENTH CHAPTER

How he who operateth should behave as regardeth the
spirits.
We have already seen how one should constrain the spirits, and what one
should ask of them; also how to dismiss them without hurt, and how we
should make answer unto their demands and presentments.
All that I am about to say unto you now is superfluous, because it is
certain that anyone who shall have observed with a true heart and firm
resolution the advice which I have given regarding the six Moons, will be
instructed with so much thoroughness and clearness by his guardian
angel, that no doubtful point will present itself which he will not be able
easily to clear up of himself.
We have also already sufficiently shown how on every or any occasion,
he who operateth should comport himself as regardeth the spirits; that is
to say as their Lord, and not as their servitor. Yet in all matters there
should be a reasonable mean, seeing that we are not treating with men,
but with spirits, of whom each one knoweth more than the whole Universe
together.
Now if you shall make some demand unto a spirit, and he shall refuse to
execute it; first well and carefully examine and consider whether it be in
the power and nature of the spirit to whom you make such demand, to
fulfil the same. For one spirit knoweth not all things, and that which
appertaineth unto the one, another knoweth not. For this reason, see that
ye well take heed before endeavouring to force them to perform a matter.
Yet if, however, the inferior spirits be disobedient, you shall call their
superiors, and remind them of the oaths which they have taken unto you,
and of the chastisement which awaiteth the breaking of such vows.
And immediately, on beholding your steadfastness, they will obey you;
but should they not, you ought then to invoke your guardian angel, whose
chastisement they will quickly feel.
Yet, notwithstanding, we should never employ harsh means, in order to
have that which we can obtain by gentleness and courtesy.
111
If during the invocation they should appear with tumult and insolence, fear
nothing; neither give way to anger; but appear to make no account
thereof. Only show them the consecrated wand, and if they continue to
make a disturbance, smite upon the altar twice or thrice therewith, and all
will be still.
It should be noted, that after you shall have licensed them to depart, and
they shall have disappeared, you shall take the censer from the top of the
altar, and having put perfume therein, take it out of the oratory onto the
terrace whereon the spirits shall have appeared, and you shall perfume
the place all round; for otherwise the spirits might work some evil unto
persons entering by chance therein.
Now should you be willing to content yourself with the symbols which be
in the third book here following; you shall the day after take away all the
sand from the terrace and cast it into a secret place; but above all things
take care not to throw it either into a river or into the navigable sea.
But should you desire to procure for yourself various other symbols and
secrets, leave the sand and all things in place, as we shall also describe
more particularly in the last chapter.
Also, should you wish it, you can retain your arrangements in place, and
keep the apartment of the oratory proper and clean, as well as the altar;
which latter you may place in a corner, should it incommode you in the
centre of the room. For in this apartment, if it be not contaminated nor
profaned, you may every Saturday enjoy the presence of your guardian
angel; the which is one of the most sublime things which you can desire
in this sacred art.
112
THE NINETEENTH CHAPTER

A descriptive list of the names of the spirits whom we may
summon to obtain that which we desire.
I will here give a very exact description of many spirits, the which (names)
either altogether or in part, or else as many of them as you may wish, you
should give written upon paper unto the eight sub-princes, on the second
day of the conjuration. Now all these (spirits) be those who will appear on
the third day, together with their princes. And these (spirits) be not vile,
base, and common, but of rank, industrious, and very prompt unto an
infinitude of things. Now their names have been manifested and
discovered by the angels, and if you should wish for more the angel will
augment them for you as far as you shall wish; seeing that their number is
infinite.
The four princes and superior spirits be:
LUCIFER
LEVIATAN
SATAN
BELIAL
ASMODEE
ARITON
BELZEBUD
AMAIMON
The eight sub-princes be:

ASTAROT
ORIENS
MAGOT
PAIMON
The spirits common unto these four sub-princes, namely

ORIENS
PAIMON
Hosen
Acuar
Nilen
Mulach
Melna
Schabuach
Sched
Sachiel
Asperim
Coelen
Parek
Saraph
Tirana
Morel
Malutens
Melhaer
Mermo
Ekdulon
Moschel
Katini
Chuschi
Rachiar
ARITON
be:
Proxosos
Alluph
Traci
Iparkas
Ruach
Melamud
Mantiens
Pereuch
Torfora
Tasma
Nogar
113
AMAIMON
Habhi
Nercamay
Enaia
Nuditon
Apolhun
Poter
Obedama
Deccal
Badad
Pachid
Adon
Trapis
Pareht
Elmis
Nuthon
Tagnon
Lirion
Losimon
Astrega
Igarak
Ekalike
Haril
Irroron
Lagasuf
Romages
Kelen
Platien
Ramaratz
Nagid
Emphastison
Asmiel
Lomiol
Parmatus
Plegit
Ragaras
Parusur
Geloma
Isekel
Kadolon
Ilagas
Alagas
Promakos
Erenutes
Atloton
Nogen
Ethanim
Paraseh
Irminon
Imink
Iaresin
Ogilen
Igilon
Igis
Kilik
Elzegan
Iogion
Balalos
Alpas
Metafel
Najin
Afarorp
Molin
Patid
Gerevil
Asturel
Plirok
Gorilon
Tarados
Gosegas
Aherom
Remoron
Ipakol
Zaragil
Oroia
Soterion
Darascon
Tulot
Morilen
(= 111 spirits servient.)

These be the spirits common unto ASTAROT and ASMODEE, viz.:
Amaniel
Amalin
Raner
Exteron
Taret
Carasch
Isigi
Abahin
Etaliz
Bialot
Akanef
Afray
Gugonix
Nimalon
Orinel
Kirik
Semlin
Laboux
Dablat
Dimurgos
Tioron
Goleg
Agei
Gagalos
Omages
Ugales
Opilm
Timira
Bubana
Ambolin
Corcaron
Buriul
Roggiol
Darokin
Guagamon
Lemel
Ragalim
Agrax
Hermiala
Daguler
114
Dramas
Buk
Abutes
Ethan
Oman
Loriol
Horanar
Laginx
Udaman
Finaxos
Sagares
Haligax
Pachei
These be the spirits common unto AMAIMON and ARITON, viz.:

Hauges
Elafon
Elaton
Agibol
Trisaga
Pafesla
Rigolen
Gagalin
Grasemin
Cleraca
These be the spirits in common between ASMODEE and MAGOT, viz.:
Toun
Biriel
Sartabakim
Mabakiel
Magog
Sifon
Lundo
Apot
Diopos
Kele
Sobe
Opun
Disolel
Magiros
Inokos
The following be those of ASTAROT, viz.:
Aman
Rax
Isiamon
Golen
Herg
Hipolos
Alan
Ugirpen
Camal
Gonogin
Bahal
Gromenis
Argilon
Ileson
Apormenos
Araex
Toxai
Schelagon
Darek
Rigios
Okiri
Camonix
Ombalat
Lepaca
Kataron
Ginar
Ischigas
Nimerix
Fagani
Bafamal
Quartas
Kolofe
These be those of MAGOT and KORE, viz.:
Nacheran
Urigo
Ubarin
Roler
Arrabin
Sorriolenen
Petunof
Tagora
Madail
Katolin
Faturab
Butarab
Arotor
Supipas
Megalak
Mantan
Debam
Abagiron
Luesaf
Fersebus
Ischiron
Hemis
Forteson
Anagotos
Meklboc
Tiraim
Pandoli
115
Masaub
Baruel
Odax
Arpiron
Dulid
Sikastin
Tigrafon
Irix
Nenisem
Cobel
Marag
Maisadul
Corodon
Egakireh
Horminos
Ilarax
Batternis
Sobel
Kamusil
Agilas
Hepogon
Paramor
Hagog
Makalos
Laboneton
Kaitar
Kolam
Daglas
Olisermon
Mimosa
Locater
Arioth
Scharak
Kiligil
Hagion
Rimog
Amchison
Colvam
(65 spirits servient.)

Those of ASMODEE be:
Onei
Sclavak
Hifarion
Sbarionat
Ormion
Mebbesser
Gilarion
Utifa
Preches
Bacaron
Eniuri
Omet
Maggid
Holba
Abadir
Sarra
These be those of BELZEBUD, viz.:
Alcanor
Diralisen
Ergamen
Lamalon
Tachan
Tromes
Nominon
Hacamuli
Borol
Magalast
Namiros
Orgosil
Bilifor
Amatia
Licanen
Gotifan
Igurim
Ikonok
Balfori
Iamai
Samalo
Sorosma.
Zagalo
Adirael
Arcon
Bilifares
Dimirag
Nimorup
Akium
Kemal
Arolen
Arogor
Plison
Corilon
Pellipis
Kabada
Ambolon
116
Lamarion
Elponen
Carelena
Dorak
Bilico
Lirochi
Holastri
Raderaf
Gramon
Natalis
Kipokis
Lamolon
These be of ORIENS, viz.:

Sarisel
Balaken
Gasarons
Gagison
Sorosma
Mafalac
Turitel
Agab
These be of PAIMON, viz.:
Aglafos
Sudoron
Ugola
Tacaros
Agafali
Kabersa
Came
Astolit
Dison
Ebaron
Roffles
Rukum
Achaniel
Zalanes
Menolik
These be of ARITON, viz.:
Anader
Sekabin
Notiser
Miliom
Maranton
Sermeot
Ekorok
Caromos
Flaxon
Ilemlis
Caron
Irmenos
Sibolas
Rosaran
Harombrub
Galak
Reginon
Saris
Sapason
Megalosin
Androcos
Elerion
These be those of AMAIMON, viz.:
Romeroc
Taralim
Illirikim
Glesi
Dalep
Ramison
Burasen
Labisi
Vision
Dresop
Scrilis
Akesoli
Akoros
Effrigis
Hergotis
117
Buriol
Erekia
Mames
Apelki
Nilima
UNDER WHAT RULERS.

Oriens, Paimon, Ariton, Amaymon
Ashtaroth and Asmodeus
Amaymon and Ariton
Asmodeus and Magoth
Ashtaroth
Magoth and Kor
Asmodeus
Beelzebub
Oriens
Paymon
Ariton
Amaymon
Total of names of servient spirits
TOTAL OF SPIRITS SERVIENT.

111
53
10
15
32
65
16
49
8
15
22
20
316
Infinite be the spirits which I could have here set down, but in order not to
make any confusion, I have thought fit to put only those whom I have
myself employed, and whom I have found good and faithful in all the
operations wherein I have availed myself of them.
Also it is true that he who shall perform this operation will be able
thereafter, according to his need, to obtain (the names of) more.
NOTES TO THE FOREGOING LISTS OF NAMES OF SPIRITS
by S. L. Mac Gregor-Mathers.
I have thought it advisable to give as far as possible some idea of the
significations of these names of spirits, which are for the most part
derived from the Hebrew or Chaldee, and also from Greek and Latin and
Coptic, etc.
THE CHIEF SPIRITS.
LUCIFER:
From Latin, Lux, Light, and Fero, to bear, = A Light Bearer. There is
a name "Lucifuge" also employed occasionally, from Lux, Light, and
Fugio, to fly from, = He who shuns the Light.
118
LEVIATAN:
From Hebrew, LVIThN (usually written Leviathan instead of
Leviatan), = the Crooked or Piercing Serpent or Dragon.
SATAN:
From Hebrew, ShTN, = an Adversary.
BELIAL:
From Hebrew, BLIOL, = a Wicked One.
THE EIGHT SUB-PRINCES.
ASTAROT:
From Hebrew, OShThRVTh, = flocks, crowds, or assemblies.
Usually written "Ashtaroth". Also a name of the Goddess Astart;
Esther is derived from the same root.
MAGOT:
May be from Hebrew, MOVTh, = small stones or pebbles; or from
MG, = a changing of camp or place; or from Greek, Magos, a
magician. Usually written Maguth. Compare the French word
"Magot," meaning "a sort of baboon," and also "a hideous dwarfish
man"; this expression is often used in fairy-tales to denote a spiteful
dwarf or elf. This spirit has also been credited with presiding over
hidden treasure. Larousse derives the name either from ancient
French or German.
ASMODEE:
Usually written "Asmodeus," and sometimes "Chashmodai".
Derived by some from the Hebrew word "Asamod," = to destroy or
exterminate; and by others from the Persian verb "Azmonden," = to
tempt, to try or prove. Some Rabbins say that Asmodeus was the
child of the incest of Tubal-Cain and his sister Naamah. Others say
that he was the Demon of impurity. Others again relate that he was
employed by Solomon in the building of the Temple at Jerusalem;
that he then attempted to dethrone Solomon, to put himself in his
place; but that the King vanquished him, and the angel Gabriel
chased him into Egypt, and there bound him in a grotto. The
Rabbins say that when Asmodeus was working at the building of
the Temple, he made use of no metal tool; but instead of a certain
stone which cut ordinary stone as a diamond will glass.
119
BELZEBUD:
Also written frequently "Beelzebub", "Baalzebub", "Beelzebuth",
and "Beelzeboul". From Hebrew, BOL, = Lord, and ZBVB,= Fly or
Flies; Lord of Flies. Some derive the name from the Syriac "Beel
d'Bobo," = Master of calumny, or nearly the same signification as
the Greek word Diabolos, whence are derived the modern French
and English "Diable" and "Devil".
ORIENS:
These four names of Oriens, Pamon, Ariton, and Amaymon, are
usually allotted to the evil kings of the four quarters of the World.
Oriens, from Latin, Oriens, = rising or Eastern. This name is also
written Uriens, from Latin, URO, = to burn, or devour with flame. It
is probably from Uriens that a mediaeval title of the Devil, viz., "Sir
Urien", is derived. The Name is also sometimes written "Urieus,"
from Latin, "URIOS", a title given to Jupiter as presiding over the
wind. Urieus is also derivable from the Greek Adj. "EURUS,
EUREIA, EURU," meaning vast or extensive. By the Rabbins he is
also called SMAL, Samael, which is derived from the Hebrew root
SML, which means "a figure, image, or idol". It is a name given in
the Qabalah to one of the chief evil spirits.
PAIMON:
Is also frequently written "Paymon", and sometimes "Paimonia".
Probably from Hebrew, POMN, = a tinkling sound or small bell. This
is again derived from the Hebrew root POM, = to agitate, impel, or
strike forward. The word POMN is employed in Exodus 28.34,
28.33, and 39.25. Paimon is also called by the Rabbins by the title
of OZAZL, Azazel, which is a name used in Leviticus with reference
to the scape-goat. Its derivation is from OZ, = a goat; and AZL, = to
go away. It has frequently been warmly discussed whether the
word in question means simply the scape-goat, or whether it
signifies a demon to whom that animal was dedicated. But in
Rabbinic demonology it is always used to mean one of the chief
demons.
ARITON:
It is also often called "Egyn," or "Egin". This name may be derived
from the Hebrew root ORH, = to lay bare, to make naked. It may
also be derived from the Greek word ARHRETON, = secret, or
mysterious, in any sense good or bad. Egin may be derivable from
120
Hebrew OGN = to delay, hinder, or retard. There may also be a

connection with the Greek AIX, AIGOS, = a goat. This spirit is also
called by the Rabbins OZAL, Azael, from the root OZ, which means
both a goat, and also vigour, vehemence of force; thus having
partly the same root as "Azazel".
AMAIMON:
Also written frequently "Amaymon"; perhaps from the Greek word
MAIMON, present participle of MAIMAO; and A as an enforcing
particle; hence Amaimon would mean "terrible violence and
vehemence". This spirit is also called by the Rabbins MHZAL,
Mahazael, perhaps from the root MZ, = to consume, or devour.
Amaymon is spoken of in the various mediaeval Magical works as
being a very potent spirit, and the use of a ring, with magical
characters to hold before the mouth while conversing with him, is
recommended as a protection against his deadly, fiery, and
poisonous breath.
THE SERVITORS OF ORIENS, PAYMON, ARITON, AND
AMAYMON.
Hosen:
From Chaldaic, ChVSN, chosen, = strong, vigorous, powerful.
Saraph:
From Hebrew, ShRP, = to burn, or devour with fire.
Proxosos:
Perhaps from Greek, PROX, PROXOKOS, = a kid.
Habhi:
From Chaldee, ChBA, or Hebrew, ChBH, = hidden.
Acuar:
From Hebrew, AKR, = a tiller of the earth.
Tirana:
Perhaps from Hebrew, ThRN, = the mast of a ship, also an apple
tree.
121
Alluph:
From Hebrew, ALVP, = a leader, a duke; also a bull, from his
leading the herd.
Nercamay:
Perhaps from Hebrew, NOR, = a boy, and ChMH = a companion.
Nilen:
Perhaps from NILUS, Latin, or NEILOS, Greek, = the River Nile.
Morel:
Perhaps from Hebrew, MRH, = to rebel.
Traci:
From Greek, TRACHUS, etc., = harsh, rude.
Enaia:
Perhaps from Hebrew, ONIH, = poor, afflicted.
Mulach:
Probably the same as "Moloch," from Hebrew, MLK, = to rule.
Malutens:
Perhaps from Hebrew, MOL, = to lie, or deceive, or prevaricate.
Iparkas:
Probably from Greek, HIPPARCHES, = a commander of cavalry, or
leader of horse.
Nuditon:
Apparently from the Latin, NUDITAS, = nakedness, derived in its
turn from NUDATUS.
Melna:
Perhaps from Hebrew, LN, to abide or rest.
Melhaer:
Perhaps from Hebrew, ML, to cut off, or divide, and ChR, whiteness,
purity.
122
Ruach:
From Hebrew, RVCh = spirit.
Apolhun:
From Greek, APOLLUON, Apollyon, = the destroyer.
Schabuach:
From Arabic = to calm or assuage.
Mermo:
From Coptic, MER, across, and MOOU, water, = across water.
Melamud:
From Hebrew, MLMD, = stimulus to exertion.
Poter:
From Greek, POTER, = a drinking cup, or vase.
Sched:
From Hebrew, ShDD, the Hebrew name for a devastating demon.
But the Hebrew root ShD implies the same idea as the English
words "to shed" ; and signifies a female breast.
Ekdulon:
Probably from Greek, EKDUO, = to despoil.
Mantiens:
From Latin, MANTIENS, and Greek, MANTEIA, = prophesying,
divining.
Obedama:
From Hebrew, OBD, = a servant. AMA = mother. But AMH = a
maid-servant, whence Obedama should signify a woman-servant.
Sachiel:
Is a name frequently given in magical works to an angel of the
planet Jupiter. SKK = to cover or protect, but SChH = to trample
down.
Moschel:
From Hebrew, MVSh, = to move oneself about.
123
Pereuch:
Perhaps from Greek, PER and EUCHE, = concerning prayer, or
given unto prayer.
Deccal:
From Hebrew, DChL, = to fear.
Asperim:
Perhaps from Latin, ASPERA, = rude, rigorous, perilous,
dangerous.
Katini:
From Hebrew, KThN, = a tunic, whence the Greek word CHITON.
Torfora:
From Hebrew, ThOR,= a small knife, or lancet.
Badad:
From Hebrew, BDD, = solitary.
I have thus far given the probable derivations at length; but I shall, for the
sake of brevity, here continue them without giving their roots and remarks
thereon:
Coelen. - Latin. Heavens.
Chuschi. - Hebrew. Silent.
Tasma. - Hebrew and Chaldaic. Weak.
Pachid. - Hebrew. Fear.
Parek. - Hebrew. Roughness, Savage.
Rachiar. - Greek. Sea breaking on rocks.
Nogar. - Hebrew. Flowing.
Adon. - Hebrew. Lord.
Trapis. - Greek. Turning.
Nagid. - Hebrew. A Leader.
Ethanim. - Hebrew. An ass; a furnace.
Patid. - Hebrew. Topaz.
Pareht. - Hebrew. Fruit.
Emphastison. - Greek. Image, representation.
Paraseh. - Chaldaic. Divided.
Gerevil. - Hebrew. Divining lot, sortilege.
Elmis. - Coptic. Flying.
124
Asmiel. - Hebrew. Storing up.

Irminon. - Greek. Supporting.
Asturel. - Hebrew. Bearing authority.
Nuthon. - Perhaps Coptic, Godlike; or Greek, piercing.
Lomiol. - Perhaps Hebrew. Binding, bitter.
Imink. - Perhaps Coptic. Devouring.
Plirok. - Perhaps Coptic. Burning up.
Tagnon. - Perhaps Greek. Heating.
Parmatus. - Greek and Latin. Shield-bearing.
Iaresin. - Hebrew. Possessing.
Gorilon. - Coptic. Axe; cleaving either to, or asunder; bones.
Lirion. - Greek. A lily.
Plegit. - Perhaps Greek. Smiting, smitten.
Ogilen. - Hebrew. Round, wheel. Tarados. - Perhaps Coptic. Dispersion.
Losimon. - Perhaps Coptic. Understanding of restriction.
Ragaras. - Perhaps Coptic. To incline, or bow the head.
Igilon. - Perhaps Greek. After the fashion of EIKELOS.
Gosegas. - Probably Hebrew or Chaldaic. Shaking strongly.
Astrega. - Perhaps Coptic. Expeditious.
Parusur. - Perhaps Greek. Present to assist.
Igis. - Perhaps from Greek HIKO, root of HIKNEOMAL. Coming.
Aherom. - Hebrew. Separation, from ChRM.
Igarak. - Perhaps Celtic, from CARAC. Terrible.
Geloma. - Hebrew, GLM, and Latin, GLOMUS. Wrapped, or wound
together.
Kilik. - Hebrew. Wrinkled with age.
Remoron. - Latin. Hindering, staying.
Ekalike. - Perhaps Greek. At rest, or quiet.
Isekel. - Hebrew. Anointing, or Anointed.
Elzegan. - Perhaps Hebrew = Turning aside.
Ipakol. - Hebrew. Breathing forth.
Haril. - Hebrew. Thorny.
Kadolon. - Perhaps Greek. A small vase, or urn.
Iogion. - Perhaps Greek. Noise of battle.
Zaragil. - Perhaps Hebrew. Scattering.
Irroron. - Latin. Sprinkling with dew.
Ilagas. - Greek. Obtaining; having obtained.
Balalos. - Perhaps Greek, BALLO, to throw.
Oroia. - Probably Greek. Returning in due season.
Lagasuf. - Perhaps Hebrew. In paleness, pining away.
Alagas. - Perhaps Greek. Wandering.
125
Alpas. - Probably Greek. Yielding.

Soterion. - Greek. Saving, delivering.
Romages. - Perhaps Hebrew. To throw and to touch.
Promakos. - Greek. A fighter in the front of a conflict.
Metafel. - Hebrew. To fasten.
Darascon. - Perhaps Celtic. Turbulent.
Kelen. - Greek. Going swiftly, as in a race.
Erenutes. - Perhaps Greek. Receiving.
Najin. - Hebrew. Propagating.
Tulot. - Chaldaic. Triple.
Platien. - Greek. Flat, broad.
Atloton. - Greek. Insufferable.
Afarorp. - Perhaps Hebrew. Breaking, rending.
Morilen. - Perhaps Greek. Foolish speaking.
Ramaratz. - Hebrew. Raised ground, or earth.
Nogen. - Hebrew. To strike a musical instrument.
Molin. - Hebrew. Abiding in a place.
THE SERVITORS OF ASHTAROTH AND ASMODEUS.
Amaniel. - Hebrew. Nourishment of God. (Frequently in Qabalistic magic
"El," the name of God, is joined to the names even of evil spirits, to
intimate that even these have no power except by his permission.)
Orinel. - Hebrew. Ornament of God; also tree of God; also elm tree.
Timira. - Hebrew. Palm.
Dramas. - Greek. Action.
Amalin. - Chaldaic. Languidness.
Kirik. - Hebrew. A stole or mantle.
Bubana. - Perhaps Hebrew. Emptiness.
Buk. - Hebrew. Perplexity.
Raner. - Perhaps Hebrew, singing; or Greek, watering.
Semlin. - Hebrew. Simulacra; appearances.
Ambolin. - Perhaps Hebrew. Tending unto nothingness.
Abutes. - Perhaps Greek. Bottomless, measureless.
Exteron. - Latin. Without, foreign, distant.
Laboux. - Perhaps Latin, and conveying the sense of "laborious".
Corcaron. - Perhaps Greek. Tumultuous, noisy.
Ethan. - Hebrew. An ass.
Taret. - Perhaps Hebrew. Dampness, tending to corruption.
Tablat. - Perhaps Hebrew. Immersions.
Buriul. - Hebrew. In terror and trembling.
126
Oman. - Perhaps Chaldaic. To cover, or obscure.

Carasch. - Hebrew. Voracity.
Dimurgos. - Greek. A fabricator, artisan, or workman.
Roggiol. - Perhaps Hebrew. To drag down; the feet.
Loriol. - Perhaps Hebrew. Unto horror.
Isigi. - Perhaps from Hebrew, and implying "error," or "to err".
Dioron. - Greek. Delay.
Darokin. - Probably Chaldaic. Paths or ways.
Horanar. - ? ?
Abahin. - Perhaps Hebrew, and signifying "terrible".
Goleg. - Probably Hebrew. Whirling.
Guagamon. - Greek. A net.
Laginx. - ? ?
Etaliz. - Hebrew. The furrow of a plough. Hence agriculture.
Agei. - Probably Hebrew. Meditation.
Lemel. - Perhaps Hebrew. For speech --?.
Udaman. - Perhaps a corruption of Greek, EUDAIMON, = fortunate.
Bialot. - Perhaps Hebrew. Absorption.
Gagalos. - Perhaps Greek. A tumour. (See somewhat similar name,
"Gagalin," in the spirits under Amaimon and Ariton.)
Ragalim. - Hebrew. Feet.
Finaxos. - Perhaps Greek. Worthy in appearance --?.
Akanef. - Hebrew. A wing.
Omages. - Greek --? for HO MAGOS, = the magician.
Agrax. - Perhaps Hebrew. Bone.
Sagares. - Greek. A double-headed battle-axe, especially that used by
the Amazons.
Afray. - Perhaps Hebrew. Dust.
Ugales. - Probably Greek. Calm.
Hermiala. - ? ? Perhaps traceable to Celtic roots.
Haligax. - ? ? Perhaps traceable to Celtic roots.
Gugonix. - ? ? Perhaps traceable to Celtic roots.
Opilm. - Hebrew. Citadels; eminences.
Daguler. - ? ?
Pachei. - Probably Greek. Thick, coarse.
Nimalon. - Perhaps from Hebrew, relating to "circumcision".
THE SERVITORS OF AMAIMON AND ARITON.
Hauges. - Apparently from the Greek "AUGE". Brilliance.
Agibol. - Hebrew. Forcible love.
127
Rigolen. - Perhaps from Hebrew, = to drag down. The same root also is
that of the word "Regel," = "foot".
Grasemin. - Perhaps from Hebrew, GRS, = a bone.
Elafon. - Probably from the Greek ELAPHOS, = a stag.
Trisaga. - Greek. Directing by triads.
Gagalin. - Perhaps Greek. Tumour, swelling, ganglion.
CLERACA. - Perhaps from Greek and Latin, " KLERIKOS," and
"CLERICUS," = clerical.
ELATON. - Probably Latin. Sublime; borne away.
PAFESLA. - Perhaps from Hebrew-? a sculptured image.
THE SERVITORS OF ASMODEUS AND MAGOTH.
TOUN. - Perhaps from Hebrew. THNH, = Hire, Price.
MAGOG. - Hebrew. The well-known Biblical name for a powerful Gentile
nation.
DIOPOS. - Greek. An overseer.
DISOLEL. - ? ?
BIRIEL. - Hebrew. Stronghold of God.
SIFON. - Greek. A Siphon or Tube for raising fluids. or Hebrew. To cover
over.
KELE. - Hebrew. To consume.
MAGIROS. - Greek. A cook.
SARTABAKIM.-? ? SRTN in Hebrew = the sign Cancer.
LUNDO. - ? ?
SOBE. - Greek. The tail of a horse; also a fly-flap.
INOKOS. - Perhaps from Latin, "INOCCO," = to rake the earth over the
newly sown seed.
MABAKIEL. - Hebrew. Weeping, Lamentation.
APOT. - Hebrew = A Treasure; a tribute.
OPUN. - Perhaps from Hebrew. A wheel.
THE SERVITORS OF ASHTAROTH.
AMAN. - Hebrew. To nourish.
CAMAL. - Hebrew. To desire God; the name of one of the archangels in
the Qabalah.
TOXAI. - From Greek, TOXEIA, = Archery; or Latin, TOXICUM, = Poison.
KATARON. - Greek. Casting down.
RAX. - Greek. A grape-seed.
GONOGIN. - Hebrew. Pleasures, delights.
128
SCHELAGON. - Hebrew. Like snow.

GINAR. - ? ? Perhaps Chaldaic - ? To perfect, or finish.
ISIAMON. - Hebrew = Solitude, desolation.
BAHAL. - Hebrew = To disturb.
DAREK. - Hebrew = a way, or path.
ISCHIGAS. - Perhaps from Hebrew, IShO, = To save, or aid.
GOLEN. - Greek. A cavern.
GROMENIS. - Perhaps Latin or Greek - ? to mark out.
RIGIOS. - Greek. Horrible, terrible.
NIMERIX. - ? ? Perhaps Celtic.
HERG. - Hebrew. To slay.
ARGILON. - Greek. Clay.
OKIRI. - Perhaps Greek - ? To cause to sink or fail.
FAGANI. - Perhaps Greek - ? Devourers.
HIPOLOS. - Greek. A Goat herd.
ILESON. - Greek. Enveloping.
CAMONIX. - ? Greek - ? Perseverance in combat.
BAFAMAL. - ? ?
ALAN. - Chaldaic. A Tree.
APORMENOS. - Greek. Uncertain.
OMBALAT. - ? ?
QUARTAS. - Latin. Fourth.
UGIRPEN. - ? ?
ARAEX. - ? Greek. ? Shock.
LEPACA. - Hebrew. For opening or disclosing.
KOLOFE. - Greek. Summit, or height of achievement.
THE SERVITORS OF MAGOTH AND KORE.
NACHERAN. - Probably Hebrew. Nostrils.
KATOLIN. - Hebrew. Walls.
LUESAF. - Perhaps Hebrew. Unto loss or destruction.
MASAUB. - Hebrew. Circuit.
URIGO. - Latin. Spoiled; unfit for food.
FATURAB. - Perhaps Hebrew - ? Interpretation.
FERSEBUS. - Perhaps Greek - ? A bringer of veneration.
BARUEL. - Hebrew. Food or nourishment from God.
UBARIN. - Greek. Insult, outrage.
BUTARAB. - ? ?
ISCHIRON. - Greek. Strong, mighty.
ODAX. - Greek. Biting.
129
ROLER. - ? ?
AROTOR. - Greek and Latin. A ploughman or husbandman.
HEMIS. - Greek. Half, half-way.
ARPIRON. - Perhaps Greek - ? Attempting straightway.
ARRABIN. - Greek. Pledge, caution money.
SUPIPAS. - Perhaps Greek - ? relating to swine.
FORTESON. - Greek. Burdened.
DULID. - ? ?
SORRIOLENEN. - ? ?
MEGALAK. - Hebrew. Cutting off.
ANAGOTOS. - Perhaps Greek - ? Conducting.
SIKASTIN. - ? ?
PETUNOF. - Coptic. Exciting.
MANTAN. - Hebrew. A gift.
MEKLBOC. - Perhaps Hebrew - ? Like a dog.
TIGRAFON. - Perhaps Greek - ? Capable of writing any matter.
TAGORA. - Coptic. Assembly.
DEBAM. - Perhaps Hebrew. Strength.
TIRAIM. - Hebrew. Filling up.
IRIX. - Greek. A hawk or falcon.
MADAIL. - Perhaps Hebrew. Drawing out from, consuming.
ABAGIRON. - Perhaps Greek - ? Gathering together.
PANDOLI. - Greek. Altogether a slave; or perhaps from Greek and Latin - possessing all wiles.
NENISEM. - Perhaps Hebrew - ? Wavings, displayings.
COBEL. - Hebrew. A Chain.
SOBEL. - Hebrew. A Burden.
LABONETON. - Perhaps from Greek, LAMBANO, = to grasp, or seize.
ARIOTH. - Hebrew. Lioness.
MARAG. - Hebrew. To drive forward.
KAMUSIL. - Hebrew. Like a rising or elevation.
KAITAR. - Perhaps from Hebrew, KThR, = a crown or summit.
SCHARAK. - Hebrew. To wind or twine about.
MAISADUL. - ? ?
AGILAS. - Perhaps Greek - ? Sullen.
KOLAM. - Hebrew. Shame; to be ashamed.
KILIGIL. - ? ?
CORODON. - Perhaps Greek - ? a lark.
HEPOGON. - Perhaps Greek - ? a saddle-cloth.
DAGLAS. - ? ?
HAGION. - Greek. Sacred.
130
EGAKIREH. - ? ?
PARAMOR. - Perhaps the same as the modern word paramour:- a lover.
OLISERMON. - Perhaps Greek and Latin - ? Of short speech.
RIMOG. - Perhaps from Hebrew, RMK, = a mare.
HORMINOS. - Greek. A stirrer up.
HAGOG. - Hebrew. The name of Gog, with the definite prefix "Ha".
MIMOSA. - Perhaps Greek. Meaning imitator. "Mimosa" is also the name
of a shrub.
AMCHISON. - ? ?
ILARAX. - Perhaps Greek - ? Cheerful; gay.
MAKALOS. - Perhaps Chaldaic - ? Attenuated, wasted.
LOCATER. - ? ?
COLVAM. - Perhaps from a Hebrew root, signifying "shame".
BATTERNIS. - ? ? Perhaps derived from Greek, BATTARIZO, = to use
vain repetitions, to babble.
THE SERVITORS OF ASMODEUS.
ONEI.- Greek, ONE. Purchase; buying.
ORMION.- Perhaps Greek - ? Moored, fastened securely.
PRECHES.- Perhaps Greek, from PRETHO, "to swell out".
MAGGID.- Hebrew. Precious things.
SCLAVAK.- Perhaps from Coptic, SzLAK, = Torture, pain.
MEBBESSER.- Either from Hebrew, BShR, = flesh, or Chaldee, BSR, =
to reject.
BACARON.- Hebrew. Firstborn.
HOLBA.- Hebrew. Fatness.
HIFARION.- Greek. A Pony or little horse.
GILARION.- ? ?
ENIURI.- Perhaps Greek. Found in.
ABADIR.- Hebrew. Scattered.
SBARIONAT.- Perhaps Coptic - ? a little friend.
UTIFA.- ? ?
OMET.- Hebrew. A neighbour.
SARRA.- Coptic. To strike.
THE SERVITORS OF BEELZEBUB.
ALCANOR.- Probably Hebrew and Arabic - ? a harp.
AMATIA.- Greek. Ignorance.
BILIFARES.- Hebrew. Lord of Division.
131
LAMARION.- ? ?
DIRALISEN.- Greek. The ridge of a rock.
LICANEN.- Perhaps from Greek, LIKNON, = a winnowing fan.
DIMIRAG.- Chaldaic. Impulsion, driving forward.
ELPONEN.- Perhaps Greek - ? Force of hope.
ERGAMEN.- Greek. Busy.
GOTIFAN.- Probably Hebrew, expressing the idea of crushing, and
turning over.
NIMORUP.- ? ?
CARELENA.- Perhaps Greek, from KAR, = Hair, and LAMBANO, = to
seize.
LAMALON.- Perhaps Hebrew. Declining, turning aside.
IGURIM.- Hebrew. Fears.
AKIUM.- Hebrew. Sure.
DORAK.- Hebrew. Proceeding, walking forward.
TACHAN.- Hebrew. Grinding to powder.
IKONOK.- Greek. Phantasmal.
KEMAL.- Hebrew. Desire of God.
BILICO.- Perhaps Hebrew - ? Lord of manifestation.
TROMES.- Greek. Wound or disaster.
BALFORI.- Hebrew. Lord of producing.
AROLEN.- Perhaps Hebrew - ? Strongly agitated.
LIROCHI.- Hebrew. In tenderness.
NOMINON.- Greek. Conventional.
IAMAI.- Hebrew - ? Days, periods.
AROGOR.- Probably Greek - ? a helper.
HOLASTRI.- Perhaps from Coptic, HOLSz, = to surround.
HACAMULI.- Hebrew. Withering, fading.
SAMALO.- Probably Hebrew. His image.
PLISON.- Perhaps Greek, from PLEO, to swim.
RADERAF.- Perhaps Greek - ? a rose-bearer.
BOROL.- Probably from Hebrew, BVR, = a pit, to bury.
SOROSMA.- Perhaps Greek. A funeral urn.
CORILON.- ? ?
GRAMON.- Greek, from GRAMMA, = Writing.
MAGALAST.- Greek. Greatly, hugely.
ZAGALO.- Perhaps Greek, from ZAGKLON, = a reaping-hook.
PELLIPIS.- Perhaps Greek - ? Oppressing.
NATALIS.- Latin. A birthday, nativity, natal.
NAMIROS.- Perhaps Coptico-Greek - ? Naval, Nautical.
ADIRAEL.- Hebrew. Magnificence of God.
132
KABADA.- Hebrew. Dulness, heaviness.

KIPOKIS.- Hebrew. Like overflowing.
ORGOSIL.- Hebrew. Tumultuous.
ARCON.- Greek. A Ruler.
AMBOLON.- Greek. Earth thrown up, or fresh turned.
LAMPLON.- Hebrew. With detestation.
BILIFOR.- Perhaps Hebrew - ? Lord of Glory.
THE SERVITORS OF ORIENS.
SARISEL. - Hebrew. Minister of God.
GASARONS. - ? ?
SOROSMA. (See same name under Beelzebub.)
TURITEL. - Hebrew. Mountain cast down.
BALAKEN. - Chaldaic. Ravagers.
GAGISON.- Hebrew. Spread out flat.
MAFALAC.- Hebrew. A fragment.
AGAB.- Hebrew. Beloved.
THE SERVITORS OF PAYMON.
AGLAFOS.- Greek. Bright light.
AGAFALI.- Perhaps from Greek, AGE, reverence.
DISON.- Greek. Divided.
ACHANIEL.- Hebrew. Truth of God.
SUDORON.- Greek. Probably a false gift.
KABERSA.- Hebrew. Wide measure.
EBARON.- Greek. Not burdensome.
ZALANES.- Greek. Trouble-bringer.
UGOLA.- ? Greek. Perhaps = Fluent in speech.
CAME.- Greek. Tired.
ROFFLES.- Hebrew. The Lion trembling.
MENOLIK.- Perhaps Greek - ? Winnowing with fury.
TACAROS.- Greek. Soft or tender.
ASTOLIT.- Probably Greek - ? Without garment.
RUKUM.- Hebrew. Diversified.
THE SERVITORS OF ARITON.
ANADER.- Greek. A flayer.
EKOROK.- Hebrew. Thy breaking, thy barrenness.
133
SIBOLAS.- Hebrew. A rushing lion.

SARIS.- Greek. A pike or spear.
SEKABIN.- Chaldee. Casters down.
CAROMOS.- Perhaps from Greek, CHARMA, = joy.
ROSARAN.- ? Hebrew - ? Evil and wicked.
SAPASON.- Perhaps from Greek, SEPO, to putrefy.
NOTISER.- Perhaps Greek, = Putter to flight.
FLAXON.- Greek. About to rend, or to be rent asunder.
HAROMBRUB.- Hebrew. Exalted in greatness.
MEGALOSIN.- Greek. In great things.
MILIOM.- Hebrew. The ender or destroyer of day.
ILEMLIS.- Hebrew. The silent lion.
GALAK.- Greek. Milky.
ANDROCOS.- Perhaps Greek - ? Arranger or orderer of men.
MARANTON.- Greek. Quenched, having extinguished.
CARON.- Greek. The name of Charon, the ferryman of the souls of the
dead in Hades.
REGINON.- Hebrew. Vigorous ones.
ELERION.- Perhaps Greek. A laugher or mocker.
SERMEOT.- Hebrew. Death of the flesh.
IRMENOS.- Perhaps from Greek, HERMENEUS, = an expounder.
THE SERVITORS OF AMAYMON.
ROMERAC.- Hebrew. Violent thunder.
RAMISON.- Hebrew. The movers with a particular creeping motion.
SCRILIS.- Probably Latin, from Sacrilegium, = a sacrilegious offence.
BURIOL.- Hebrew. Devouring fire of God.
TARALIM.- Hebrew. Mighty strongholds.
BURASEN.- Hebrew. Destroyers by stifling smoky breath.
AKESOLI.- Greek - ? the distressful, or pain-bringing ones.
EREKIA.- Greek probably. One who tears asunder.
ILLIRIKIM.- Hebrew. They who shriek with a long drawn cry.
LABISI.- Hebrew. The flesh inclothed.
AKOROS.- Greek. Overthrowers of authority.
MAMES.- Hebrew. They who move by backward motion.
GLESI.- Hebrew. One who glistens horribly, like an insect.
VISION.- Latin. An apparition.
EFFRIGIS.- Greek. One who quivers in a horrible manner.
APELKI.- Greek. The misleaders or turners aside.
DALEP.- Hebrew. Decaying in liquid putrefaction.
134
DRESOP.- Hebrew. They who attack their prey by tremulous motion.

HERGOTIS.- Greek. A labourer.
NILIMA.- Hebrew. The evil questioners.
(End of Notes on Names of Spirits.)
135
THE TWENTIETH CHAPTER

How the operations should be performed.
The aforesaid operation being finished, it is necessary, in order to render
this instruction complete, to say how we should manage the operations
which he who operateth wisheth to put into practice.
Firstly, then, having come unto the end, and having obtained all that is
necessary; you cannot sufficiently praise and honour God, and his most
holy name, even although you had a thousand tongues; neither also can
you sufficiently magnify and thank your holy angel guardian as he
meriteth. However, you ought to render thanks proportionate to your
estate and to the great treasure which you have received. It is necessary
also that you should fully understand how you ought to enjoy these
immense riches, so that they may not be in your hands unfruitful, or even
harmful. Because this art is like a sword in your hand, capable of serving
for all kinds of evil and for hurt unto your neighbour. But in putting it into
practice for that sole end for which it hath been made, namely for
vanquishing therewith the demon and enemies, then shall you be making
a good use hereof. I wish also further to give you some instruction upon
certain necessary and principal points.
The operation of the spirits being finished, you shall continue a whole
week to praise God; and as regardeth yourself personally, you shall do no
servile work during the seven days, neither shall you make any
convocation of the spirits in general, nor of the familiars; and afterwards,
when the seven days be passed, you shall commence to exercise your
power, as shall be hereafter said:
(1) Take heed before all things to perform no magical operation soever, or
invocations of the spirits on the Sabbath day, during the whole period of
your life, seeing that that day is consecrated unto God, and is the day on
which you should repose and sanctify yourself, and you should solemnise
it by prayers.
(2) Keep yourself as you would from the Eternal Fire, from manifesting
unto any living being that which your guardian angel shall have confided
unto you; excepting unto him who hath given unto you the operation, unto
whom you have as it were a greater obligation than unto your own father.
136
(3) As far as lieth in your power take heed in no way to make use of this
art against your neighbour; except for a just vengeance; although I
counsel you even in this particular to imitate God, who pardoneth even
you yourself, and there is not in the world a more meritorious action than
to pardon.
(4) In the case of your angel dissuading you from some operation, and
forbidding you to do the same, keep well from becoming obstinate
therein, for you would in such a case ever repent it.
(5) Fly all kinds of (evil) science, magic, and enchantments, because they
be all diabolical inventions; also put no trust in books which teach them,
though in appearance they may seem reliable to you, for these be nets
which the perfidious Belial stretcheth out to take you.
(6) In conversing with spirits good or evil, never employ words which you
do not understand, because even so will you have shame and hurt.
(7) You shall never demand of your guardian angel any symbol wherewith
to operate for an evil end, seeing that you would grieve him. You will find
only too many persons who will beseech you to do thus; see that you do it
not!
(8) Accustom yourself as much as possible to purity of body and
cleanliness of raiment, seeing that this is very necessary; for the spirits,
both good and evil alike, love purity.
(9) As far as possible shun the employment of your wisdom for others in
evil things; but first well consider him to whom you would render a
service; because it often happeneth, that in doing service unto another
one worketh evil for oneself.
(10) In no way attempt to procure the operation of the holy angels unless
you have extreme need thereof, seeing that these holy angels be so far
above you that it is useless for you to wish to compare yourself unto
them, you being nothing in comparison of them who are the angels of
God.
(11) If the operations can be performed by the familiar spirits, it is not
necessary to employ others therein.
137
(12) Though it should be an easy matter for you to employ your familiars
to annoy your neighbour, seek to abstain therefrom, unless it were to
repress the insolence of such as might attempt aught against you
personally. Never keep the familiar spirits in idleness, and should you
wish to give one over unto any person, see that such person be
distinguished and meritorious, for they love not to serve those of base
and common condition. But should such person unto whom you give
them have made some express pact (with spirits) in such case the
familiar spirits will fly in haste to serve him.
(13) These three books of this present operation ought to be read and
reread an infinitude of times; so that in the space of six Months before
commencing, he who operateth should be fully instructed and informed
therein; and if he be not a Jew, he should further be conversant with
many of the customs and ceremonies which this operation demandeth, so
as to become accustomed unto that retirement which is so necessary and
useful.
(14) Should he who performeth this operation during the six months or
Moons commit voluntarily any mortal sin prohibited by the tables of the
Law, be certain that he will never receive this wisdom.
(15) Sleep in the day-time is entirely forbidden, unless absolutely
requisite, owing to some infirmity, or to old age, or to debility of
constitution; for God is always willing to employ mercy towards mankind,
because of their infirmities.
(16) If you have not the fixed intention of continuing the operation, I
counsel you on no account to commence it; because the Lord doth not
care to be mocked, and he chastiseth with corporal maladies those who
make a mock of him. Howbeit, he who is hindered from continuing
through some unforeseen accident, sinneth in no way.
(17) It is impossible for him who hath passed fifty years of age to
undertake this operation. Thus also was it the custom in the true and
ancient Jewish law concerning the priesthood. Also, he should not be less
than twenty-five years of age.
(18) You shall not permit the familiar spirits to familiarise themselves too
much with you, through your disputing and arguing with them; because
138
they will propound so many affairs and things at once as to confound and
trouble the mind.
(19) With the familiar spirits you should not make use of the symbols of
the third book, unless it be those of the fifth chapter thereof; but if you
desire anything, command them aloud to perform it. Never commence
many operations at once and in the same time, but when you have
finished one then begin another, until you are perfect in the practice; for
an apprentice artist doth not become a master suddenly, but little by little.
(20) Without reasons of the very last importance, the four princes or the
eight sub-princes should never be summoned, because we must make a
great distinction between these and the others (who are inferior to them).
(21) In operating, as rarely as possible insist upon the spirits appearing
visibly; and thus you will work all the better, for it should suffice you for
them to say and do what you wish.
(22) All prayers, orations, invocations, and conjurations, and in fact
everything you have to say, should be pronounced aloud and clearly,
without however shouting like a madman, but speaking clearly and
naturally, and pronouncing distinctly.
(23) During the six Moons, you shall sweep the oratory every Sabbath
eve, and keep it strictly clean, for it is a place dedicated unto the holy and
pure angels.
(24) Take heed that you commence no operation at night if it be
important, unless the need be very pressing.
(25) Your only object during your whole life should be to shun as far as
possible an ill-regulated life, and especially the vices of debauchery,
gluttony, and drunkenness.
(26) Having completed the operation, and being now the possessor of the
true wisdom, you shall fast three days before commencing to put it in
practice.
(27) Every year you should make a commemoration of the signal benefit
which the Lord hath conferred upon you; at such time feasting, praying,
and honouring your guardian angel that day with your whole strength.
139
(28) During the three days on which you constrain the spirits you shall
fast, for this is essential, so that when you are working you may find
yourself freer and more tranquil both in body and mind.
(29) Note that the fasts are to be understood as commencing always from
the first nocturnal star, and not otherwise.
(30) Keep as an indubitable precept never to give this operation unto a
monarch, because Solomon was the first who abused it; and if you should
do the contrary, both you and your successors would alike lose the grace
hereof. With regard to this command, I myself having been sought by the
Emperor Sigismond, gave him willingly the best familiar spirit which I had;
but I steadily refused to give him the operation; and it should not be given
unto emperors, kings, or other sovereigns.
(31) You may assuredly give, but it is not permissible to sell, this
(operation), for this would be to abuse the grace of the Lord who hath
given it unto you, and should you act contrariwise unto this, you would
lose its control.
(32) Should you perform this operation in a town, you should take a
house which is not at all overlooked by anyone; seeing that in this present
day curiosity is so strong that you ought to be upon your guard; and there
ought to be a garden (adjoining the house) wherein you can take
exercise.
(33) Take well heed during the six Moons or months to lose no blood from
your body, except that which the expulsive virtue in you may expel
naturally of its own accord.
(34) Finally, during that whole time, you shall touch no dead body of any
description soever.
(35) You shall eat during this whole period neither the flesh nor the blood
of any dead animal; and this you shall do for a certain particular reason.
(36) You shall bind by an oath him unto whom you shall give this
operation, neither to give nor sell it unto any avowed atheist or
blasphemer of God.
140
(37) You shall fast for three days before giving the operation unto any;
and he who shall receive it shall do likewise; and he also shall hand over
unto you at the same time the sum of ten golden florins, or their value, the
which you should with your own hand distribute unto poor persons whom
you shall charge to repeat the Psalms, Miserere Mei Deus, etc., "Have
mercy upon me, O God"; and the De Profundis, etc., "Out of the depths".
(38) It will be a good thing, and one which will facilitate the operation, for
you to repeat all the Psalms of David, seeing that they contain great
power and virtue; and to say them at least twice in the week.
Also you shall shun gaming as you would the plague; because it ever is
an occasion of blasphemy. Also during this time prayer, and the study of
the sacred books, should take the place of gaming with you.
All this advice, and much more which you would be certain to receive
from your angel guardian, I have here set down, so that by observing the
same perfectly, without failing in the slightest particular, you shall at the
end of the operation find the value thereof. I am now, therefore, about to
give you distinct and sufficient information how to employ the symbols,
and how to proceed if you wish to acquire others.
You are then to understand that once he who operateth hath the power, it
is not necessary (in all cases) to use written symbols, but it may suffice to
name aloud the name of the spirit, and the form in which you wish him to
appear visibly; because once they have taken oath, this sufficeth. These
symbols, then, be made for you to avail yourself of them when you be in
the company of other persons; also you must have them upon you, so
that in touching or handling them simply, they may represent your wish.
Immediately then he unto whom the symbol appertaineth will serve you
punctually; but if you should desire something special which is in no way
connected with or named in the symbol, it will be necessary to signify the
same at least by showing your desire by two or three words. And here it is
well to observe, that if you use prudence, you can often reason with those
persons who be with you in such a manner that the spirits, having
however been beforehand invoked by you, will understand what they are
to do; but it is necessary to discover your intent unto them by words. For
they be of such great intelligence, that from a single word or a single
motive, they can draw the construction of the whole matter; and although
they cannot penetrate into the inmost parts of the human mind, yet
nevertheless by their astuteness and subtlety they be so adroit that they
comprehend by perceptible signs the wish of the person in question.
141
But when it is a grave and important matter, you should retire into a
secret place apart, provided it be appropriate, for any place is good to
invoke the spirits proper unto the operation. There give them their
commission regarding that which you wish them to perform, the which
they will either execute then or in the days following. But always give
them the signal by word of mouth, or in any other manner that may be
pleasing unto you, whenever you wish them to begin to operate. Thus did
Abramelin in Egypt, Joseph in Paris, and as for myself, I have always
acted in the same manner. I have also made myself a very great man,
and especially one who hath been of service unto princes and great lords.
I will hereafter tell clearly what operations belong unto this or unto that
spirit, and how it is necessary to act.
Now will I teach you how all those (symbols) which be in this book, as
well as those which you will (hereafter) receive from the spirits
(themselves), ought to be written down and acquired. For the number of
operations is infinite, and it would be an impossibility to set them all down
in this work. If therefore you should wish to perform certain fresh
operations by the use of a symbol not set down in any way in the third
book [I am speaking of good and permissible operations], you shall make
the demand thereof from your guardian angel in this manner:
Fast the day before, and on the following morning you, being well
washed, shall enter into the oratory, put on the white tunic, illumine the
lamp, and put the perfume in the censer. Then lay the lamen of silver
upon the altar, whereof the two angles shall be touched with the holy
anointing oil; fall upon your knees and make your orison unto the Lord,
rendering unto him grace for the benefits which you have received in
general.
Then shall you supplicate him to be willing to send unto you your holy
angel, that he may instruct you in your ignorance, and that he may deign
to grant your demand. After this, invoke your holy guardian angel, and
pray him to favour you with his vision, and to instruct you how you should
design and prepare the symbol of the operation desired. Also you shall
remain in prayer until you shall see appear in the room the splendour of
your angel. Then wait to see if he shall expound or command anything
touching the form of the symbol demanded. And when you have finished
your supplication, arise and go to the plate of silver, whereon you shall
find written as it were in drops of dew, like a sweat exuding therefrom, the
symbol as you ought to make it, together with the name of the spirit who
142
should serve you for this operation, or else that of his prince. And without
touching or moving the lamen, copy at once the symbol just as it
appeareth, and leave the plate of metal upon the altar until the even; at
the which time, after having made your ordinary orison, and returned your
thanks, you shall put it away in a piece of clean silk.
The most convenient day for procuring these symbols is the Sabbath;
because by such an operation, we do not in any way violate (its sanctity),
neither do we injure the same at all. Also we can prepare all things
necessary the day before. But if the angel should not appear, and should
not in any way manifest unto you the symbol, then may you be certain
that the pretended operation, although it may appear good in your eyes,
is not so considered by God and by your guardian angel; and in such
case you shall change your demands.
Now, as regardeth the symbols for evil operations, these shall you obtain
more easily; seeing that after (putting on) the perfume, there is nothing
else to do but to make your orisons. Then being clad in your white tunic,
you shall put on over it the silken vestment and the girdle, and after that
the crown, taking the wand in your hand, and placing yourself at the side
of the altar towards the terrace. Then, holding the wand, conjure in the
same manner as you did on the second day. And when the spirits shall
have appeared, you shall command them in no way to quit the place, until
they shall have manifested unto you the symbol of the operation which
you desire, together with the names of the spirits capable of putting the
same into execution, together with their symbols. And then you shall see
the prince unto whom the operation appertaineth avow, write, and sign
upon the sand the symbol, together with the name of the spirit who is to
serve for this operation. Then shall you take the surety and oath of the
prince upon the symbol, and also of his ministers, as you will have
previously done in accordance with the (directions given in the) fourteenth
chapter. And should several symbols be given, make them take oath
upon them all. This being done, you can dismiss them in the manner we
have already described, taking heed before this to copy the symbols
which they shall have traced upon the sand, because in departing they
will destroy the same. And when they have gone, take the censer and
perfume the place, as before said.
I do not however write this, so that you may hereby, as well as by the use
of certain of the symbols described in the third book, work evil; I have in
no way written them down for such an end; but only that you may
143
understand the full perfection of this art, and what we can herewith
perform. For the evil spirits be exceeding prompt and exceeding obedient
in the working of evil; it is to be wished that they were as much so for the
good. However, take heed that you be upon your guard.
And remember, that as there is a God to write these aforesaid symbols,
there is no particular preparation necessary of pens, of ink, and of paper;
nor yet of elections of particular days, nor other things to be observed,
which the false magicians and enchanters of the devil would have you
believe. It sufficeth that the symbols should be clearly written with any
kind of ink and pen, provided that we may easily discern unto what
operation each sign appertaineth, the which also you can easily do by
means of a properly arranged and drawn up register of them. But the
greatest part of the symbols of the third book I counsel you to make
before commencing the operation, keeping them until that time in the
interior of the altar. And after that the spirits shall have taken oath
thereupon, you shall carefully keep (the symbols) in a safe place, where
they can neither be seen nor touched by any other person, because thus
great harm might befall such person.
Now will we declare unto you what symbols be manifested by the good
angels and what by the evil, and unto what prince each operation is
subject, and lastly, what should be observed as regardeth each symbol.
By whom the symbols of the chapters of the third book be manifested.
The symbols of the chapters of the third book, which be manifested only
by the angels, or by the guardian angel, be these, namely:
Chapter I. (To know all manner of things past and future, which be
not however directly opposed to God, and to his most holy will.)
Chapter III. (To cause any spirit to appear, and take any form, such
as of man, animal, bird, etc.)
Chapter IV. (For divers visions.)
Chapter V. (How we may retain the familiar spirits bond or free in
whatsoever form.)
Chapter VI. (To cause mines to be pointed out, and to help forward
all kinds of work connected therewith.)
Chapter VII. (To cause the spirits to perform with facility and
promptitude all necessary chemical labours and operations, as
regardeth metals especially.)
144
Chapter X. (To hinder any necromantic or magical operations from

taking effect, except those of the Qabalah, or of this Sacred
Magic.)
Chapter XI. (To cause all kinds of books to be brought to one, and
whether lost or stolen.)
Chapter XVI. (To find and take possession of all kinds of treasures,
provided that they be not at all magically guarded.)
Chapter XVIII. (To heal divers maladies.)
Chapter XXV. (To walk upon, and operate under, water.)
Chapter XXVIII. (To have as much gold and silver as one may
wish, both to provide for one's necessities, and to live in opulence.)
The following (symbols) be manifested in part by the angels and in part by

the evil spirits, which is why we must not avail ourselves hereof without
the permission of the holy angel. They are those of:
Chapter II. (To obtain information concerning, and to be

enlightened upon, all sorts of propositions, and all doubtful
sciences.)
Chapter VIII. (To excite tempests.)
Chapter XII. (To know the secrets of any person.)
Chapter XIII. (To cause a dead body to revive, and perform all the
functions which a living person would do, and this during a space
of seven years by means of the spirits.)
Chapter XIV. (The twelve symbols for the twelve hours of the day
and of the night, to render oneself invisible unto every person.)
Chapter XV. (For the spirits to bring us anything we may wish to
eat or to drink, and even all (kinds of food) that we can imagine.)
Chapter XVII. (To fly in the air, and travel any whither.)
Chapter XIX. (For every description of affection and love.)
Chapter XX. (To excite every description of hatred and enmity,
discords, quarrels, contentions, combats, battles, loss, and
damage.)
Chapter XXIV. (To discover any theft that hath occurred.)
Chapter XXVI. (To open every kind of lock without a key, and
without making any noise.)
Chapter XXIX. (To cause armed men to appear.)
145
The following (symbols) be only manifested by the evil spirits, namely:
Chapter IX. (To transform animals into men, and men into animals,
etc.)
Chapter XXI. (To transform oneself, and take different faces and
forms.)
Chapter XXII. (This chapter is only for evil, for with the symbols
herein we can cast spells, and work every kind of evil; we should
not avail ourselves hereof.)
Chapter XXIII. (To demolish buildings and strongholds.)
Chapter XXVII. (To cause visions to appear.)
Chapter XXX. (To cause comedies, operas, and every kind of
music and dances to appear.)
Unto what prince the operations of each chapter are submitted.

Astarot and Asmodee do together execute the symbols and operations of:
Chapter VI. (To cause mines to be pointed out, and to help forward
all kinds of work connected therewith.)
Chapter VII. (To cause the spirits to perform with facility and
promptitude all necessary chemical labours and operations, as
regardeth metals especially.)
etc.)
Asmodee and Magot together do execute the operations of:
Chapter XV. (For the spirits to bring us anything we may wish to

eat or to drink, and even all (kinds of food) that we can imagine.)
Astarot and Ariton both do execute the following chapter by their

ministers, yet not together, but each separately:
146
Oriens, Paimon, Ariton, and Amaimon will execute by means of the

ministering spirits common unto them, the following, namely:
Chapter I. (To know all manner of things past and future, which be
not however directly opposed to God, and to his most holy will.)
Chapter II. (To obtain information concerning, and to be
enlightened upon all sorts of propositions, and all doubtful
sciences.)
Chapter III. (To cause any spirit to appear, and take any form, such
as of man, animal, bird, etc.)
Chapter IV. (For divers visions.)
Chapters V. (How we may retain the familiar spirits bond or free, in
whatsoever form.)
functions which a living person would do, and this during a space
of seven years, by means of the spirits.)
Chapter XVII. (To fly in the air, and travel any whither.)
Chapter XXVII. (To cause visions to appear.)
Amaimon and Ariton together perform:
Chapter XXVI. (To open every kind of lock without key, and without
making any noise.)
Oriens alone performeth:
Chapter XXVIII. (To have as much gold and silver as one may
wish, both to provide for one's necessities, and to live in opulence.)
Paimon (alone) performeth:
Ariton performeth:
147
Amaimon (performeth):
Astarot (performeth):

Chapter XXIII. (To demolish buildings and strongholds.)
Magot (performeth):
Chapter X. (To hinder any necromantic or magical operations from

taking effect, except those of the Qabalah, or of this Sacred
Magic.)
Chapter XXI. (To transform oneself, and take different faces and
forms.)
Chapter XXX. (To cause comedies, operas, and every kind of
music and dances to appear.)
Asmodee (performeth):
Belzebud (performeth):
etc.)
Chapter XX. (To excite every description of hatred and enmity,
discords, quarrels, contentions, combats, battles, loss, and
damage.)
Chapter XXII. (This chapter is only for evil, for with the symbols
herein we can cast spells, and work every kind of evil; we should
not avail ourselves hereof.)
The operations of the following chapters can also (to a great extent) be
administered by the familiar spirits, namely:
Chapter II. (Scientific information.)
148
Chapter IV. (Visions.)

Chapter XII. (Secrets of other persons.)
Chapter XVIII. (Healing of maladies.)
Chapter XIX. (Affection and love.)
Chapter XXIII. (Demolishing buildings.)
Chapter XXIV. (Discovery of theft.)
Chapter XXVII. (Causing visions to appear.)
Chapter XXVIII. (Obtaining money.)
Chapter XXX. (Visions of operas, comedies, etc.)
If at the beginning they excuse themselves from the performance, there is

probably some hindering cause, and in this case you should make use of
other spirits; but otherwise they must obey you in and throughout
everything that you shall command them.
Instructions and explanations concerning what points we should
particularly observe with regard to each chapter of the third book, and
especially chapters I, II, IV, VI, VII, X, XXIII, XXV, XXVII, XXIX, and XXX.
Chapter I. (To know all manner of things past and future, which be not
however directly opposed to God, and to his most holy will.)
First take the symbol in your hand, place it (upon the top of your head)
under your hat, and either you will be secretly warned by the spirit, or he
will execute that which you have the intention of commanding him to do.
Chapter III. (To cause any spirit to appear, and take any form, such as of
man, animal, bird, etc.)
Take in your hand the symbol, and name the spirit, who will appear in the
form commanded.
Chapter V (How we may retain the familiar spirits bond or free, in
whatsoever form.)
We must understand that every man may have four familiar or domestic
spirits, and no more. These spirits can serve you in many ways, and they
are granted unto you by the sub-princes.
The first hath his period of power from Sunrise until Noon.
The second, from Noon until the setting of the Sun.
149
The third, from the setting of the Sun until Midnight.

And the fourth, from Midnight even unto the sunrising of the following day.
He who possesseth them is free to avail himself of their services under
whatever form may be pleasing unto him.
Of this kind of spirits there is an infinite number, who at the time of their
fall were condemned to serve man; and to each man there be four of
them destined; and each one is obliged to serve during a period of six
hours, and in the case of your giving one over unto some other person,
you can no longer avail yourself of his services, but in order to replace
him during his time of service, you may call upon some other spirit. And
should you wish to send away one of the said spirits before the six hours
during which he is on guard be expired, it sufficeth for you to make him
some sign that he can go, and at once he will obey. But when the six
hours of their guard be expired, the aforesaid spirits will depart of their
own accord without demanding your permission, and the next in rotation
will successively take the place (of his predecessor). But if you have
given one away (unto another person), you will employ one of the
common kind in his place.
If you should wish to excite tempests, give the signal above your head
(and touch the symbol on the top); and when you wish to make them
cease, you shall touch it on the underneath side.
Chapter IX. (To transform animals into men, and men into animals, etc.)
Let the being, whether man or animal, see the symbol, and then touch
them suddenly with it, when they will appear transformed; but this will be
only a species of fascination. When you wish to make it cease, you shall
put the symbol upon the head (of the being) and strike it with the wand,
and the spirit will then restore matters to their former condition.
Our predecessors, from the commencement of the world, have written
many and divers excellent books of the Qabalah, whose value surpasseth
150
that of all the riches of the World. These books have been for the most
part lost by the providence or command of God, who hath not been willing
that his high mysteries should be made public by such means; seeing that
hereby through such books the worthy and unworthy can equally arrive at
the enjoyment and possession of the secret things of the Lord. Some also
have been burned in fires, or swept away by the waters, and other similar
accidents (have occurred) through the evil spirits, who are jealous of
Man's possessing such great treasures, and of being obliged to obey him.
But this third part (of this book), that is to say the Sacred Magic, is that
which hath not been entirely lost, but the greater part hath been hidden
and built up within a wall, and this hath happened by order of the good
spirits, who have not permitted this art to altogether perish, being willing
that he who should (desire the same) should employ honourable means
to obtain the same from the true and only God, and not from that
perfidious one and deceiver, the Devil, and his following.
This operation being completed in the proper manner, you will be able to
see and to read these books; but it is not permitted unto you to copy
them, nor to keep them in your memory more than once. As for myself, I
have made every effort to copy them, but as fast as I wrote, the writing
used to disappear from the page; whence you may conclude that the Lord
knowing our nature, which is inclined unto evil, doth not wish that such
great treasures should be employed to serve unto that end, and unto the
destruction of the Human Race.
For this operation it sufficeth to touch the symbol, for at once the spirit
doth whisper the reply in your ear; but should you comprehend by such a
means anything vile, whatever it may be, as you love the grace of the
Lord, see that you keep yourself from making manifest that which (you
have obtained by the use of) the symbol, seeing that by so doing you
might work harm unto your neighbour. Every time that you touch the
symbol you should mention by name the person whose secrets you
desire to know.
functions which a living person would do, and this during a space of
seven years, by means of the spirits.)
151
I can in truth both say and affirm that a man who hath just died is divided
into three parts, viz.: body, soul, and spirit. The body returneth unto the
earth, the soul unto God or unto the Devil, and the spirit hath its period
determined by its creator, that is to say, the sacred number of seven
years, during the which it is permitted to wander hither and thither in any
direction; at length it taketh its decision, and goeth straightway unto the
place whence it came forth (at the beginning). To change the condition of
the soul is impossible, but the grace of the Lord, for many causes and
reasons which it is not here permitted unto me to make manifest, hath
been willing to permit that, with the aid of the spirits, we may force the
spirit to return and to conjoin itself again with the body, so that for the
space of seven years it can operate any matter. And although this spirit
and the body joined together can perform all the functions and exercises
which they used to execute when the body, the soul, and the spirit were
together, yet is it only an imperfect body, being in this case without the
soul.
This operation is, however, one of the greatest, and one which we should
only perform in extraordinarily important cases; seeing that in order to
accomplish it the chief spirits have to operate.
Nothing else is necessary than to be attentive to the moment when the
man is just dead, and then to place the symbol upon him towards the four
quarters of the world; and at once he will lift himself up and begin to move
himself he should then be dressed; and a symbol similar to that which
hath been placed upon him should be sewn into his garment. Know also
that when the seven years be expired, the spirit which was conjoined with
the body will at once depart, and that we cannot further prolong the period
of the aforesaid seven years. I made proof of this operation in the Morea
for the Duke of Saxonia, who had only children who were minors, and the
eldest was between twelve and thirteen years of age, unfit for the
government and management of his estate, the which his own relatives
would have seized upon and appropriated unto themselves; and by this
means I provided (against the contingency), and prevented that estate
from falling into other hands.
Chapter XIV. (The twelve symbols for the twelve hours of the day and of
the night, to render oneself invisible unto every person.)
To render oneself invisible is a very easy matter, but it is not altogether
permissible, because that by such a means we can annoy our neighbour
152
in his (daily) life, for we can easily employ the same for producing various
effects, and we can also work an infinitude of evils (herewith). But,
honestly speaking, we must not do the latter, such being expressly
forbidden by God. This is wherefore I entreat you to avail yourself hereof
always for a good and never for an evil end! You have in this chapter
twelve symbols, for twelve different spirits submitted unto Prince Magot,
who are all of the same force. You should put the symbol (upon the top of
your head) under the hat or bonnet, and then you will become invisible;
while on taking it away, you will appear visible again.
Chapter XV. (For the spirits to bring us anything we may wish to eat or to
drink, and even all kinds of food that we can imagine.)
As for this symbol, and all like ones appertaining unto this chapter, when
you shall wish to make use of them, you shall put them between two
plates, dishes, or jugs, closed together, on the outside of a window, and
before a quarter of an hour shall have passed, you will find and will have
that which you have demanded. But you must clearly understand that with
such kind of viands you cannot nourish men for more than two days only;
for this food, although it be appreciable by the eyes and by the mouth,
doth not long nourish the body, which hath soon hunger again, seeing
that this (food) giveth no strength to the stomach. Know also that none of
these (viands) can remain visible for more than twenty-four hours, the
which period being passed, fresh ones will be requisite.
Should you wish to discover or to take possession of treasure, you must
select the symbol which you wish, whether it be of a common or of a
particular operation, and the spirit will at once show it unto you, of
whatsoever kind, or after whatsoever fashion, it may be. Then shall you
place the symbol which is referable unto it thereon, and it will no longer
be possible for it to disappear into the ground, nor for it to be carried
away. Furthermore, the spirits destined unto the guard of this treasure will
flee, and you can then dispose of it as you wish, and take it away.
153
Chapter XVII. (To fly in the air and travel anywhere.)

Name the place whitherunto you wish to travel, and place the symbol
upon your head, under the bonnet or the hat; but take well heed lest the
symbol fall from off you through negligence or want of caution. Do not
journey at night-time unless necessity or some pressing reason thereto
com elleth you, but select the day-time, and that serene and calm.
Undo the bandages of the sick person, and clean them, and having
applied the unguent and the compresses, put them again upon the sick
person; and place the symbol upon them, and leave it thus for about a
quarter of an hour, then take it away and keep it (for use on another
occasion). But if it be an internal malady, you shall place the symbol upon
the bare head of the patient. These symbols may be seen and examined
without any danger, howbeit it is always better that they should neither be
seen nor handled by any other person than yourself.
Chapter XIX. (For every description of affection and love.) And Chapter
XX. (To excite every description of hatred and enmity, discords, quarrels,
contentions, combats, battles, loss, and damage.)
On request, and by the intermediary of the spirits, we can obtain love,
goodwill, and the favour of princes and sovereigns, on this wise: Name
aloud the person or persons by whom you wish to be loved, and move the
symbol answering to the class under which they fall; because if you be
operating for yourself in matters falling under the heads of love,
friendship, etc., you should absolutely name aloud the person, and move
the symbol.
But if you name or operate for two other persons, whether it be for love or
for hatred, you should expressly name both, and move the symbols
answering to the classes under which they fall. Also, if it be possible, you
can touch them with the symbol, whether it be general or particular.
Under this heading are included all classes of goodwill, among the which
the most difficult by far is to make yourself beloved by religious persons.
154
Chapter XXI. (To transform oneself, and take different faces and forms.)
In this transmutation, which is rather a fascination, the method of
operating is as follows: Take the symbol in your left hand, and with it
stroke your face. Now were it some (ordinary) necromancer who was
transformed by the working of some diabolical art, he would soon be
discovered (by you). It is certain, however, that if he who operateth be
instructed in the true and Sacred Magic, like yourself, that he could
produce no effect upon you; because against the grace of the Lord, by
whomsoever received, no operation can take effect, whether for good or
for evil; but should such be diabolical operations by express pacts and
similar sorceries, it is certain that you would soon bring them to shame.
Chapter XXII. (This chapter is only for evil, for with the symbols herein we
can cast spells, and work every kind of evil; we should not avail ourselves
hereof.)
All these symbols are to be either buried in the ground, or placed under
doors, steps, or buried under paths and other places by which people do
pass, or whereon they lean; in this latter case it is sufficient merely to
touch (such places) with the symbol. It must be here remarked that we
can work much evil against our enemies, and if you know for a certain
fact that they are attempting your life, there is no imaginable sin in
availing yourself of (these symbols for protection). But should you do this
to please some friend, you would not escape easily with impunity from
(the disapproval of)your guardian angel. Use then this knowledge as a
sword against your enemies, but never against your neighbour, which
would be without any result but that of bringing hurt to yourself.
Chapter XXVI. (To open every kind of lock, without key, and without
making any noise.)
Should you wish to open anything locked, such as ordinary locks (bolts),
padlocks, coffers, cupboards, boxes, and doors, you shall touch them
with the side of the symbol which is written upon, and immediately they
will open without any noise, without being in any way damaged, and
without exciting any suspicion of their having been broken open. When
you wish to again close them, you shall touch them with the back of the
symbol, that is to say, with the part thereof not written upon, and at once
they will refasten of their own accord. And in no way should this operation
be employed in churches, or for the committing of murder. Also
155
(remember) that this operation can be used for all manner of wicked
ends; wherefore we should obtain (permission) first from our guardian
angel, so as not to irritate him, and abuse the grace of God, which we
have received. Neither should this (operation) be employed to aid in the
commission of rapes and violation of women; but only for (laudable)
effects, and other (permissible) ends.
The child of whose services you avail yourself for the conclusion of this
operation should not be more than seven years of age; it should be able
to speak clearly, it should be active, and should comprehend what you
teach it to do, in order to serve you. And fear not that this child may be
able to reveal and tell unto others anything of what he doeth; also he will
not in the least remember that which he shall have done, and you can
make trial thereof yourself by interrogating him after the seven days be
past, and you will find that he will be able to tell you nothing of that which
hath passed; the which is a very remarkable thing.
When you shall have thoroughly decided to give this present operation
unto any, and which should only be given as a free gift, as I have already
said; remember to make such person give you seven florins, the which
you shall distribute unto seven poor persons with your own hand, and
such poor persons must genuinely be in want. Them shall you straitly
charge, to repeat for seven days the seven Penitential Psalms, or the
Pater and Ave seven times a day, praying unto the Lord for the person
who hath given (the florins) unto you to distribute unto them, that He
would deign to come unto his assistance, and to grant unto him for ever
such strength that he may never transgress his holy commandments.
While in the performance of the operation, be certain that each person
(undertaking the same) is subject unto very great temptations to
prevarication, and in particular unto great disquietudes of mind, to force
the abandonment of the operation. For the mortal enemy of man is
grieved that he should make the acquisition of this sacred science, the
which also he receiveth from God himself, who hath by this means closed
the way against the Demon, this being the only object and end of this
sacred science. For the enchantments whereof the evil enchanters and
sorcerers make employ, are in no way wrought by the true method, and
they only have power to execute their end in proportion to the tributes,
sacrifices, and pacts, rendered in return, which latter evidently bring about
the loss of the soul, and very frequently that of the body as well.
156
Consider that it is the pride of (the Demon) which hath chased him out of
Heaven, and think what a heartbreaking thing it is for him to see a man,
made of vile earth, command him who is a spirit, and who was created
noble, and an angel (as well); and also that it is necessary that he should
submit himself unto man, and obey him, not of his own free will, but by
force, and by a power of command which God hath given unto Man, to
whom he is forced to humiliate himself, and to obey, he, who had the
greatest difficulty in submitting himself unto his Creator. And yet,
notwithstanding all this, he is obliged by his most profound humiliation,
and by his most severe suffering, to submit himself unto man, for whom
further is destined that Heaven which he himself hath lost for an eternity.
Wherefore you should continue the operation, and have recourse unto the
Lord, and in no way be troubled, for you shall vanquish every difficulty,
seeing that the Lord never faileth those who put all their confidence in
him. You may only give this sacred operation unto two persons; and in
the case of your giving it unto a third, it would hold good for him, but you
yourself would be forever deprived of it. I beseech you in grace to well
open your eyes, and thoroughly examine him unto whom you shall give
so great a treasure, so that he be not one who will make use of the same
to make a mock of God, which is a sin so great, that we Jews are a living
proof thereof. For since our predecessors began to make use of this
Sacred Magic for evil, God hath granted it unto so few among us, that in
my whole lifetime, ourselves included, we be but the number of seven
persons who by the grace of God possess the same.
When the child shall warn you that your guardian angel hath appeared,
then shall you, without moving from your place, repeat in a low voice
Psalm CXXXVII, which beginneth: "Confitebor Tibi Domine, in toto corde
meo," "I will give thanks unto Thee, O Lord, with mine whole heart," etc.
And, on the contrary, when you shall convoke for the first time the four
chief spirits, you shall say Psalm XC: "Qui habitat in adjutorio Altissimi,"
"Whoso dwelleth in the defence of the most high," etc.; and this not in a
low voice as in the preceding case, but (aloud) as you usually speak, and
standing where you happen to be.
Chapter XXVIII. (To have as much gold and silver as one may wish, both
to provide for one's necessities, and to live in opulence.)
And whereas I have allowed the twenty-eighth chapter to pass without
notice, I now refer hereto. Place the symbol of the money you require in
your purse, let it remain there for a short time, then put your right hand in
157
your purse, and you will there find seven pieces of the class of money
which you have intended to obtain. But take heed to perform this
operation only thrice in the day. And the pieces of money whereof you
have no longer need will disappear at once. This is why when you have
need of small change you should take heed at the same time not to ask
for large pieces. I could have here set down other values and symbols,
but I have only given those which I have found the most necessary for a
beginner, and partly also to avoid confusing you. And also it is not right
that I who am only a mortal man should give further instructions hereon
unto you who are about to have an angel for master and for guide.
We have already said that providing he recogniseth a God, any man, of
any religion soever, may arrive at the possession of this veritable wisdom
and magic, if he employ right and proper ways and means. Now I say
further that unto whatever law he who operateth may pertain, he can
observe the feasts, etc., thereof, provided that they hinder not the
operation, with a firm and true conviction that he shall have from his angel
greater lights as to the points wherein he may be liable to err. Wherefore
you shall be ready and willing to correct your faults, obedient in all things,
and on all occasions, unto his precepts. And you should observe exactly
and inviolably from point to point, everything touching the regimen of life,
the practice, and other counsels given in this book.
As we have already said, if by chance some slight indisposition should
overtake you after the commencement of the operation, you shall observe
that hereinbefore laid down; but should the illness become very much
worse, so that remedies become necessary unto the health of the body,
and that you have to undergo blood-letting; then do not harden yourself
against the will of the Lord, but having made a brief prayer, thank him for
having visited you in this manner. And having made use of remedies
which oblige you to leave off the operation already begun, so as not to
become as it were your own murderer, and notwithstanding that it
grieveth you to the heart to be forced so to do, yet nevertheless conform
yourself unto his holy will. And when you shall have regained your
accustomed health, in his own good time shall you return unto the
operation, feeling sure that he will grant you his aid. Such a forced
desistance doth not hinder you from awaiting a fitting time, when you may
recommence; seeing that such interruption is not in any way voluntary,
but forced by necessity. Whereas, had this interruption occurred through
pure caprice, you ought never to think further of (recommencing),
because we must not make a mock of God.
158
There be two kinds of sins which are infinitely displeasing unto God. One
is ingratitude, and the other incredulity. I say this cursorily, because the
Devil will not fail to insinuate a thousand ideas into your head (such as)
that this operation may perhaps be (a real thing) and perhaps not; that the
symbols are badly drawn, etc., so as to make you comment upon the
subject. This is why you must have faith, and that you must believe.
Neither should you dispute concerning that which you understand not;
remember that God out of nothingness hath created all things, and that all
things have their being in him; watch, work, and you will see.
In the name of the most holy Adonai, the true and only God, we have
finished this book in the best order and with the best instruction which has
been possible to me. Know also that it is only in God that you will find the
sole and certain way to arrive at the true wisdom and magic, but yet also
by following out that which I have written down in this book with such
exactitude.
Still, however, when you shall have put anything into practice, you shall
manifestly know how great and immeasurable hath been my paternal
affection; and in truth I dare to say that I have done for love of you what
no one in our times hath undertaken, and in especial in that I have
declared unto you the two symbols, that of the child, and your own
particular one, without the which I swear unto you by the true God that out
of an hundred persons who might undertake this operation, there would
be only two or three who would actually attain unto it. I have, however,
removed most of the difficulties, (therefore) be now tranquil, and despise
not my counsel.
It need not appear strange unto you that this book is not at all like unto so
many others which I have, and which are composed in a lofty and subtle
style; because I have composed this (work) expressly in order to spare
you so much labour, and to enlighten therein the difficulties which you
might (otherwise) have encountered in order to comprehend its meaning.
And so that it might not be at all necessary for it to pass into other hands
(than your own), in making this book I have in no way availed myself of
eloquent but peculiar expressions, which those who write such works
usually make use of and even then not without mystifications. But I have
employed a certain manner of arrangement, making a mixture of the
subject matter, and dispersing it here and there in the chapters so that
you may be forced to read and re-read the book many times, and also the
better so to do, to transcribe and imprint it in your memory. Render then
159
your thanks unto the Lord God almighty, and never forget my faithful
advice, even unto the day of your death. Thus will the divine wisdom and
magic be your wealth, and never can you find a greater treasure in the
world. Obey promptly him who teacheth you that which he hath learned
by his own experience; and I pray and conjure you by that God who is my
God, to observe summarily and inviolably the three following heads which
should serve you as guides and limitations until you shall pass the gulf of
this miserable world:
(1) Let God, his word, all his commandments, and the counsel of your
angel, never depart from your heart and from your mind!
(2) Be the declared enemy of all the evil spirits, their vassals, and
adherents, during the whole period of your life. Dominate them, and
regard them as your servitors. If they make propositions to you,
demanding from you pacts, or sacrifices, or obedience, or servitude,
refuse them with disdain and menaces.
(3) It is more than evident that God can know the heart of men, the which
none else can do. You should therefore force yourself to test severely for
some time him to whom you intend to give this (knowledge). You shall
closely note his method of life and habits; you shall discuss the subject
with him, seeking to discover in the clearest way and as far as possible,
whether he would use it for good or for evil. Also in giving this operation
you shall fast, eating only once a day, and he who shall receive it shall do
the same; see also what we have said in the third chapter, and
elsewhere. It is also true that one who would suffer much in health by
fasting in such a manner, may if absolutely necessary supplement the
same by paying one or several persons to fast in his stead and to
intercede for him. (The whole object and end of) this should be both to
give and receive this operation unto the glory of the great God, and unto
one's own good and that of one's neighbour, whether friend or enemy,
and unto that of all things created.
The ten florins of gold shall be distributed by your own hands when you
shall have received the money, unto seventy-two poor persons who know
the Psalms, as mentioned in a preceding chapter; and see also that you
fail not in this, for it is an essential point.
Furthermore you shall demand from him to whom you shall give the
operation, some pleasurable gratification which is in harmony with the
160
operation, at your choice. But see that you demand not money, for for this
you would be deprived entirely of the Holy Wisdom.
Every time that you shall desire to make a fresh command, you shall
thrice repeat the Psalm XC, "Qui habitat in adjutorium Altissimi," etc.,
"Whoso dwelleth in the aid of the Most High," etc. -- because this Psalm
possesseth so great a virtue that you will be astonished when you
comprehend it.
.
If you know that you, as a man, have offended your creator, in anything
regarding the tables of the Law; perform no operation until after having
made a general confession of your sins unto God; the which you shall
observe unto the day of your death. By thus acting the mercy of the Lord
will never depart from you.
Unto the which Lord be praise, and glory, and honour, for the gifts which
he hath granted unto us.
So be it!
The End of the Second Book
161
THE THIRD BOOK

OF THE
SACRED MAGIC
SOLOMON, AND OTHER
SAINTS, PATRIARCHS, AND PROPHETS; WHICH TEACHETH
1458.
162
THE THIRD BOOK.

PROLOGUE
He who shall have faithfully observed that which hath been taught unto
him, and shall have with a good will obeyed the commandments of God,
let him, I say, be certain that this veritable and loyal wisdom shall be
accorded unto him; and also that the perfidious BELIAL can do no
otherwise than become his slave, together with all his pestiferous
generation.
However I pray the true God who governeth, ruleth over, and maintaineth
all that he hath created; that thou, O Lamech, my son, or whomsoever he
may be unto whom thou shalt have granted this sacred operation, mayest
work it out, having always before thee the fear of God, and in no way use
it for evil, because God the eternal hath wished herein to leave us our
free will, but woe unto him who shall abuse his divine grace. Yet I say not
but that if an enemy should attempt thy life, that it is permissible unto thee
if necessary to destroy him; but in any other case lay not thine hand unto
the sword, but use gentler methods. Be kind and affable unto everyone.
One may also serve a friend without harm unto oneself.
David and King Solomon could have destroyed their enemies in an
instant, but they did not so; in imitation of God himself who chastiseth not
unless he is outraged.
If thou shalt perfectly observe these rules, all the following symbols and
an infinitude of others will be granted unto thee by thy holy guardian
angel; thou thus living for the honour and glory of the true and only God,
for thine own good, and that of thy neighbour.
Let the fear of God be ever before the eyes and the heart of him who
shall possess this divine wisdom and Sacred Magic.
163
THE FIRST CHAPTER

To know all manner of things past and future, which be not
however directly opposed to God, and to his most holy
will.
(1) To know all things past and future in general.
(2, 3) To know things appertaining unto the future.
(4) Things to happen in war.
(5) Things past and forgotten.
(6) Tribulations to come.
(7) Things propitious to come.
(8) Things past regarding enemies.
(9) To know the signs of tempests.
(10) To know the secrets of war.
(11) To know true and false friends.
164
165
Notes To The Chapters Of Magical Symbols,

By S. L. MacGregor-Mathers.
The following notes to these chapters I have classed under various heads
for greater convenience of reference, thinking that besides the
explanations of most of the magical names employed in the symbols, it
would also be of assistance to the occult student to be able to see at a
glance briefly stated at the end of each chapter, the substance of the
information especially referring thereto, given by Abraham the Jew in
other parts of the work, notably towards the end of the second book:Under (a) therefore I have stated by what powers the symbols of each
particular chapter are manifested.
Under (b) the names of the sub-princes of the evil spirits who are the
especial overseers of the execution of the effect desired.
Under (c) whether the operations of the chapter in question can be to an
extent performed by the "familiar spirits," or not.
Under (d) an abridgment of any especial instructions given by Abraham in
other parts of the work.
166
Under (e) I have given the meanings of most of the names employed in
the squares, as far as possible, and also any additional remarks which
seemed necessary.
These magical symbols of this third book consist solely of squares of
letters, which may be roughly divided into four distinct classes.
1. Those in which the whole of the square is occupied by letters. In
this form the double acrostic arrangement is especially marked;
though in some few cases it is slightly varied by the introduction of
a different name.
2. Those in which part of the square is left vacant, the letters being
arranged in the form of what is called in geometry, a gnomon.
3. Those in which the central part of the square is left vacant, the
letters forming a border round the void part.
4. Those of more irregular disposition, and in which in some instances
single letters are placed separately in the vacant part of the square.
It will be remarked that in nearly all cases these names arranged in the
squares represent generally the effect to be produced, or in other words
are simply the Hebrew or other appellations of the result to which the
square is to be applied. At the beginning of each chapter is placed a
numbered list of the effects to be obtained by the use of each symbol
there given. Then follow the squares themselves.
In the original Ms. these squares have been also numbered to correspond
with the list at the beginning of each chapter, but from the evident
difference in the ink this has been done later, though the handwriting is
the same. I think also that in several cases the numbers to the squares
have been misplaced; and though usually the natural sequence of 1, 2, 3,
4, 5, 6 is adhered to, yet occasionally they are in a more irregular order,
as in the fifth chapter, for example, where they run thus:- 3, 4, 5, 6, 1, 2,
7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12.
The squares in the original Ms. are all of the same size, subdivided
according to the exigences of the case, though convenience of printing
has prevented this equality of size being adhered to in the present work.
In most instances the gnomons and borders are ruled off from the vacant
part, but this rule is not adhered to in all cases in the original Ms. The
167
letters in the squares are Roman capitals. In some few instances two
letters are placed in the same small square, or subdivision, of the larger
square.
Notes to chapter I.
(a) The symbols of this chapter are manifested only by the angels or by
the guardian angel.
(b) ORIENS, PAYMON, ARITON, and AMAYMON execute the operations
hereof by means of their common ministers.
(c) The familiar spirits cannot well execute the operations of this chapter.
(d) Take the symbol in your hand, place it under your hat or cap, upon the
top of your head, and you will be secretly answered by the spirit who will
execute that which you wish. (This mode of operation will evidently be
applicable to many of the chapters.)
(e) No. 1 is a square of 25 squares, and is a complete specimen of
double acrostic arrangement. MILON, though Greek-sounding, has here
hardly a meaning if derived from either MILOS, a fruit or other tree; or
from MEILON, a precious thing, or article of value. -- It seems rather
derived from the Hebrew MLVN = a diversity of things, or matters. -IRAGO is perhaps from Greek EIRA a question, or inquiry, and AGO to
conduct or decide. Hebrew RGO = to disrupt or analyse. -- LAMAL,
probably from Chaldaic MLA = fullness, entirety. OGARI from Hebrew
OGR = a swallow or swiftly-flying thing. NOLIM from Hebrew, NOLIM =
hidden or covered things. Whence we may extract the following as the
formula of this Square: "Various questions fully examined and analysed,
and that quickly, and even things carefully hidden and concealed". This
rule we can apply to discover the formulas of other squares.
No. 2 is a square of 49 squares, and is also a complete specimen of
double acrostic. THIRAMA from Chaldee TIRM = strongly-defended
places, or citadels. HIGANAM from Hebrew or Chaldee GNN or GNM = to
defend. IGOGANA, perhaps from Hebrew GG = a roof or covering or
protection from above. RAGIGAR, perhaps from Chaldaic ROO (it must
be remembered that, though I here transliterate the letter Ayin by O, it has
really the power of a Gh as well; it is a sound difficult of comprehension
by a non-Orientalist); = to break up, or breach. ANAGOGI probably from
168
Greek ANAGOGE = the act of raising or elevating. MANAGIH from

Hebrew MNO = to restrain; stop, put a barrier to, or contain by a barrier.
AMARIHT from Hebrew AMRTh = word or speech. The whole idea of this
formula seems to be the making forcible way into a defended place or
matter.
No. 3 is a square of 25 squares, and again a perfect form of double
acrostic. DOREH, from DVR Hebrew = a habitation. ORIRE perhaps from
Latin ORIOR = to rise or be born. RINIR perhaps from Hebrew NIR = to
renew. ERIRO perhaps from ARR = to curse. HEROD from Hebrew
ChRD = shaking, trembling.
No. 4 is a square of 25 squares, and again a perfect double acrostic.
NABHI from Hebrew NBA = to prophesy. ADAIH perhaps from Heb. DIH
=a bird of omen. BAKAB from Heb. KAB = in trouble. HIADA from Hebrew
IDH = sent forward, or thrown. IHBAN from IHB Hebrew = to give or bring.
Hence the formula would be somewhat "To prophesy by omens the
troubles to come"; the which is much more applicable to No. 6, "The
tribulations to come"; than to No. 4, which is for "The things to happen in
war".
No. 5 is a double acrostic of 49 squares. NVDETON from Hebrew ND =
to remove, and AThN = strongly. VSILARO from Hebrew BSHL = to ripen,
and Chaldaic ARO = the Earth. DIREMAT from Hebrew DR = to
encompass or include, and MT = things forgotten or slipped aside.
ELEMELE from Hebrew ALIM and ALH = God of the Mighty Ones.
TAMERID from Hebrew ThMR = straight like a palm-tree, and ID = put
forward. ORALISV = from Hebrew = ORL = superfluous, and ISh = the
substance. NOTEDVN, from NTH = to stretch out and DN = to contend or
rule.
No. 6 is a double acrostic of 36 squares. SARAPI from Hebrew ShRP = to
burn. ARAIRP from Hebrew AR = a river, and RPH = to abate or slacken.
RAKKIA from Hebrew RKK = to become faint, to become softened.
AIKKAR from Hebrew OKR = to trouble or disturb. PRIARA from PRR =
to shatter or break up. IPARAS from Hebrew PRS = to break in pieces, to
divide, or part in sunder. This will give a formula of trouble.
169
No. 7 is a double acrostic of 36 squares. MALACH from Hebrew MLCh =

salt; also that which is easily dissolved; to dissolve. AMANEC from MNK
= a chain, or from AMN = stability. LANANA from LNN = to lodge, or take
up one's abode. ANANAL from AN = labour, and NLH, to complete or
finish. CENAMA perhaps from QNM = odoriferous. HCALAM perhaps
from HCL = spacious (as a palace).
No. 8 is a double acrostic of 25 squares. KOSEM, from Hebrew QSM = to
divine or prognosticate. OBODE, from Hebrew OBD = a servant. SOFOS
from Greek SOPHOS = wise, learned, skilful. EDOBO, perhaps from DB
= to murmur. MESOK from Hebrew MSK = to mingle or intermix.
No. 9 is a double acrostic of 36 squares. ROTHER is perhaps from RTT,
trembling, dread; and HRR to conceive or bring forth. ORORIE from
Hebrew OROR = laying bare, disclosing. TOARAH from Hebrew ThVRH
= law, reason, or order of. HARAOT from Hebrew HRH to bring forth, or
from ChRTh = To inscribe or mark down. REHTOR from RTT and ThVR
= reason for dread. The whole formula will represent the disclosing of the
reasons for dreading any terrible effect.
No. 10 is another double acrostic of 64 squares, and No. 11 one of 49
squares. I have here given a sufficiently careful analysis of the meanings
of the combinations formed by the letters in the preceding squares to give
the reader a general idea of the formulas involved. To avoid an undue
extension of these notes, I shall not usually analyse every name
contained in each square, but shall confine myself in most cases to giving
sufficient indications of the meanings of the principal words or words only,
which are therein employed. The reader must remember also that in such
an acrostic arrangement of the letters of words, half of those therein
contained will simply be inversions of the principal word or words therein
contained.
For example, in No. 11, REAHBEM is of course MEBHAER
written backwards. ELIAILE reads the same way backwards or forwards,
and so does HAOROAH; and BIKOSIA written backwards gives
AISOKIB.
Yet undoubtedly some of these words are to an extent translatable also,
and in this case will be found to have a bearing on the subject-matter of
the square. Hebrew especially is a language in which this method will be
found to work with a readiness unattainable in ordinary European
170
languages, from the fact that its alphabet may be said to be entirely
consonantal in character, even such letters as Aleph, Vau, and Yod,
being rather respectively, a drawing in of the breath than the letter A; V
rather than U; and Y rather than I. Also in common with all really ancient
languages the system of verbal roots from which all the words of the
language are derived, has this effect, viz., that the majority of
combinations of two or three letters will be found to be a verbal root,
bearing a definite meaning. Besides all this, in the Qabalah each letter of
the Hebrew alphabet is treated as having a complete sphere of
hieroglyphic meanings of its own; whence the most important ancient
Hebrew names and words can be treated by the Qabalistic initiate as in
fact so many formulas of spiritual force. I have been thus lengthy in
explanation in order that the reader may have some idea of the reason of
the construction and use of these magic squares.
171
THE SECOND CHAPTER

To obtain information concerning, and to be enlightened
upon all sorts of propositions and all doubtful sciences.
(1)
(2) All three generally for the above effect.
(3)
172
Notes to chapter II.

(a) The symbols of this chapter are manifested partly by the angels, and
partly by the evil spirits.
hereof by the means of their common ministers.
(c) The familiar spirits can to an extent execute the operations of this
chapter.
(d) Take the symbol in your hand, and name what information you
require.
(In the second book, the remarks given concerning this chapter are
evidently far more applicable to the third chapter, and I have therefore
given them there instead of here.)
(e) No. 1 is an acrostic of 25 squares. ALLUP from Hebrew ALUP = a
doctor, teacher, leader, i.e., a person who at the same time leads and
instructs his following. Hence also this word means a bull as the leader of
the herd. URIEL, Hebrew AURIEL = Light of God, is the well-known name
of one of the archangels. Pulla in Latin means both a fowl, and also light
173
friable earth; but is probably here derivable rather from the Hebrew PLH,
meaning to classify or arrange.
No. 2 is an acrostic of 64 squares. MELAMMED is evidently from Hebrew
MLMD = a stimulus or spur to exertion.
No. 3 is an acrostic of 49 squares. EKDILUN may be from the Greek
EKDEILON, which means, "not afraid of"; from EK in composition, and
DEILON, frightened, cowardly.
174
THE THIRD CHAPTER

To cause any spirit to appear, and take any form, such as
of man, animal, bird, etc.
(1) It will appear in the form of a serpent.
(2) To make them appear in the shape of any animal.
(3) In human form.
(4) In the form of a bird.
175
Notes to chapter III.

(a) The symbols of this chapter are manifested only by the angel or by the
guardian angel.
(c) The familiar spirits do not execute the operations of this chapter.
(d) Take the symbol in the hand, and name the spirit desired, who will
appear in the form commanded.
(e) It will be noticed at once that of the four symbols of this chapter, the
first has the name of the archangel Uriel, and the three others those of
three of the chief princes of the demons, viz.: Lucifer, Leviathan, and
Satan.
No. 1 is an acrostic of 25 squares. URIEL from Hebrew AURIEL = Light of
God. RAMIE from Hebrew RMIH = deceit. IMIMI is either from IMM = the
sea, or great waters, or from IMIM = mules. EIMAR is probably from AMR
or IMR = To speak. LEIRU is the reverse of URIEL, i.e., Uriel written
backwards. This formula seems to show that the symbol should be
numbered 2 instead of 1.
No. 2 is an acrostic of 49 squares. LUCIFER from Lucifer (Latin) = light
bearer. This square should probably be numbered 3.
No. 3 is an acrostic of 64 squares. LEVIATAN from Hebrew = the piercing
or twisting serpent. This square should probably be numbered 1.
No. 4 is an acrostic of 25 squares. SATAN from Hebrew ShTN = an
adversary. ADAMA from Hebrew ADMH = reddish earth.
176
THE FOURTH CHAPTER

For divers visions.
(1) For mirrors of glass and crystal.
(2) In caverns and subterranean places.
(3) In the air.
(4) In rings and circlets.
(5) In wax.
(6) In fire.
(7) In the Moon.
(8) In the water.
(9) In the hand.
177
178
Notes to chapter IV.

the guardian angel.
(b) ORIENS, PAIMON, ARITON, AMAYMON execute the operations
(c) The operations of this chapter can also be to an extent performed by
the familiar spirits.
(d) No especial instructions are given regarding this chapter in the second
book.
(e) No. 1 is a gnomonic square of 15 squares taken from a square of 64
squares. GILIONIN = Chaldaic GLIVNIM = mirrors.
No. 2 is a gnomonic square of 13 squares out of a square of 49 squares.
ETHANIM = AThVNIM, Heb. = vaults, ovens.
No. 3 is a gnomonic square of 13 squares out of a square of 49 squares.
APPARET, Latin = Let it appear.
No. 4 is a square of 36 squares. BEDSER = Hebrew BTzR a gold
ornament. ELIELE = ALI ALI Hebrew = towards me. SEPPED Hebrew
SPD = he struck. RES DEB = perhaps Hebrew, RSh DB head or chief
point of a discourse.
179
No. 5 is a square of 25 squares. NEGOT = perhaps Heb. NHG, he leads.

ERASO = probably Greek, sec. pers. sing. from EROMAI for EIROMAI, to
demand or interrogate. GARAG = perhaps from Heb. GRO, to diminish.
OMARE = perhaps Greek, an assembly or synthesis. TOGEN = perhaps
from Greek TOGE, = why or wherefore when used in an adverbial sense.
No. 6 is a square of 16 squares. NASI = Hebrew NSI = my banner or
symbol. APIS = the Egyptian sacred bull. SIPA = perhaps from SPH =
Hebrew to consume. ISAN = perhaps from Heb. IShN = to sleep.
No. 7 is a square of 25 squares. GOHEN should perhaps be COHEN = a
Jewish priest. ORARE, Latin = to pray. HASAH, Heb. HSH = to keep
silence. ERARO perhaps from Heb. ARR = to curse. NEHOG = perhaps
Heb. NHG = to lead.
No. 8 is a gnomonic square of 9 squares out of 25 squares. ADMON =
perhaps from Heb. DMO = tears but also liquids or fluids.
No. 9 is a gnomonic square of 9 squares out of 25 squares. LELEH =
Hebrew LILH = night, darkness.
180
THE FIFTH CHAPTER

How we may retain the familiar spirits bond or free in
whatsoever form.
(1) In the form of a lion.
(2) In the form of a page.
(3) In the form of a flower.
(4) In the form of a horseman.
(5) In the form of an eagle.
(6) In the form of a dog.
(7) In the form of a bear.
(8) In the form of a soldier.
(9) In the form of an old man.
(10) In the form of a Moor.
(11) In the form of a serpent.
(12) In the form of an ape.
181
182
Notes to chapter V.
the guardian angel.
(b) ORIENS, PAIMON, ARITON, and AMAYMON execute the operations
(c) The familiar spirits can hardly be said so much of themselves to be
able to execute the operations of this chapter, as under the rule of the
afore-mentioned spirits.
183
(d) Each person can have four familiar spirits and no more: the first
working from Sunrise to Midday; the second from Midday till Sunset; the
third from Sunset to Midnight; and the fourth from Midnight till Sunrise.
Such spirits may also be loaned to friends, in which case you can avail
yourself of another ordinary spirit in place.
(e) The square numbered 1 is not however placed first in order in the
MS., but fifth. It is a gnomon of 11 squares taken from a square of 36
squares. ANAKIM = Hebrew ONQIM = giants; the root ONQ also = a
necklace or torque. This word "Anakim" hardly appears to have any
reference to the form of a lion. No. 2 is a gnomon of 11 squares again,
taken from a square of 36 squares, and is in the MS. placed sixth in
order. CEPHIR in Hebrew means KPIR a young lion; and this square
should probably therefore be numbered 1. No. 3 is a gnomon of 13
squares taken from a square of 49 squares; and in the MS. occupies the
first place in order. OIKETIS, Greek, means a maid-servant or feminine
page. This square therefore should probably be numbered 2. No. 4 is a
gnomon of squares taken from a square of 25 squares. PARAS = Hebrew
PRSh, a horse, or horseman, while PRS = an ossifrage, a bird of the
hawk or eagle kind. This square is apparently correctly numbered, though
in the MS. it is in the second place.
No. 5 is a gnomon of 9 squares taken from a square of 25 squares.
RACAH is apparently from the Hebrew RQH meaning vain, empty; and
does not seem to have any particular reference to any of the forms
mentioned for the symbols. No. 6 is again a gnomon of 9 squares, taken
from a square of 25 squares. It is placed fourth in order in the MS. CUSIS
may be from the dative plural of the Greek word KUON = a dog, but in
Hebrew it would mean numbering, computing. No. 7 is a border of 24
squares taken from a square of 49 squares. PERACHI, perhaps from
PRK, savagery. DB is a bear in Hebrew. No. 8 is a square of 25 squares.
RISIR, perhaps from Latin "RISOR," a mocker or jester. ISERI, perhaps
from Hebrew or Chaldaic root, ISR, to punish or whip. SEKES, perhaps
from SChSh = reborn by hope. No. 9 is again a square of 25 squares.
NESER = Hebrew, NShR, an eagle; which seems to shew that this
square should be numbered 5. ELEHE is probably ALHI, Hebrew = my
God. SEPES ? ShPS = the hair on the lip, the moustache. RESEN = RSN
Heb., = a bridle or bit. -- No. 10 is a gnomon of 11 squares taken from a
square of 36 squares. PETHEN = Hebrew, PThN, an asp or venomous
serpent, whence this square should probably be numbered 11. No. 11 is
a square of 25 squares. KALEF = KLP, Hebrew, a hammer. ARARE from
184
Hebrew ARR to curse, cursed. LAMAL perhaps means "in speaking" from
MLL, Hebrew, to speak. No. 12 is a gnomon of squares taken from a
square of 9 squares. KOBHA = perhaps Hebrew KBH = to extinguish.
185
THE SIXTH CHAPTER

To cause mines to be pointed out, and to help forward all kinds
of work connected therewith.
(1) To prevent caves from falling in.
(2) To shew a gold mine.
(3) To cause work to be done in mines.
(4) To make work done in inaccessible places.
(5) To make them tunnel mountains.
(6) To cause all water to be withdrawn from the mines.
(7) To make the spirits bring timber.
(8) To make them found and purge metals and separate gold and silver.
186
187
Notes to chapter VI.

the guardian angel.
(b) ASTAROTH and ASMODEUS execute together the operations of this
chapter.
book.
(e) No. 1 is a border of 20 squares taken from a square of 36 squares.
TELAAH = perhaps from ThVLOH, = a worm which pierces holes in the
ground.
No. 2 is a border of 32 squares taken from a square of 81 squares.
ALCABRUSI may mean "supported by planks or props, or beams". If so,
probably this square should be numbered 1.
CADSAR perhaps from QTzR = to shorten or abbreviate a matter or
work.
No. 4 is a square of 49 squares. PELAGIM, Hebrew PLGIM = divisions,
strata, etc.
No. 5 is a square of 36 squares. KILOIN = Hebrew QLOIM, excavations.
NAKAB = Hebrew, NQB = piercing, perforation.
No. 7 is a square of 36 squares. KITTIK may mean = "To arrange in a
store-place". TINNAT recalls a name used on some of the Gnostic
magical gems. TANNIT is the name of a Tyrian goddess.
No. 8 is a gnomon of 9 squares out of a square of 25 squares. MARAK,
from Hebrew MRQ = to cleanse, purge, or refine.
188
THE SEVENTH CHAPTER

To cause the spirits to perform with facility and promptitude all
necessary chemical labours and operations, as regardeth metals
especially.
(1) To make all metals.
(2) To make them perform the operations.
(3) To make them teach chemistry.
Notes to chapter VII.

(a) The symbols of this chapter are manifested only by the angels, or by
the guardian angel.
189
(b) ASHTAROTH and ASMODEUS together execute the operations of

this chapter.
book.
(e) No. 1 is a gnomon of 11 squares taken from a square of 36 squares.
METALO from Greek METALLON = in metal, mineral, or mining work.
No. 2 is a square of 36 squares. TABBAT, Chaldaic ThIBVTh = heads or
sections of classification of operations. ARUUCA perhaps from ARUQ,
adhering to.
No. 3 is a square of 49 squares. IPOMANO, probably from Greek
HIPPOMANES, an ingredient used in philtres, etc., perhaps put here for
chemical drugs in general.
190
THE EIGHTH CHAPTER

To excite tempests.
(1) To cause hail.
(2) To cause snow.
(3) To cause rain.
(4) To cause thunder.
Notes to chapter VIII.

(a) The symbols of this chapter are manifested partly by the angels and
partly by the evil spirits.
191
(b) ASHTAROTH executes the operations of this chapter.

(c) The familiar spirits cannot execute the operations of this chapter.
(d) To excite a tempest, give the signal above you, and touch the symbol
on the top. To make it cease, touch it underneath.
(e) No. 1 is a square of 49 squares. CANAMAL = Hebrew ChNML, i.e.,
hailstones of great size.
No. 2 is a border of 16 taken from a square of 25 squares. TAKAT, TKO,
Hebrew, has the sense of "immersed in, overflowed by".
No. 3. A gnomon of 11 squares taken from a square of 36 squares.
SAGRIR, Hebrew SGRIR = "a most vehement rain and tempest".
No. 4. A square of 25 squares. HAMAG, perhaps from Hebrew, MOK, "to
compress. or crush, or press".
192
THE NINTH CHAPTER

To transform animals into men, and men into animals; etc.
(1) To transform men into asses.
(2) Into stags or deer.
(3) Into elephants.
(4) Into wild boars.
(5) Into dogs.
(6) Into wolves.
(7) Animals into stones.
193
Notes to chapter IX.

(a) The symbols of this chapter are only manifested by the evil spirits.
(b) ASHTAROTH and ASMODEUS together execute the signs and
operations of this chapter.
194
(d) Let the being, whether man or animal, see the symbol, and then touch
them suddenly with it; when they will appear transformed; but this is only
a kind of fascination. When you wish to make it cease, place the symbol
upon the head and strike it sharply with the wand, and the spirit will make
things resume their ordinary condition.
(e) No. 1 is a square of 49 squares. IEMIMEI is evidently from Hebrew
IMIM = mules. A very perfect acrostic.
No. 2 is a square of 49 squares also. AIACILA, Hebrew AILH = a deer.
No. 3 is a border of 24 taken from a square of 49 squares. CHADSIR;
Hebrew KZR = fierce, savage. ChTzR = perhaps, "the tusk of an
elephant". But ChZIZ = a wild boar, whence this square should perhaps
be numbered 4.
No. 4 consists of 24 squares taken from a square of 49 squares; two
letters, Si, are allotted to one square. BEDASEK is perhaps from BD, a
limb, and SK, covered or protected, as with a strong skin. It may thus
stand for the elephant as having powerful and thick-skinned limbs. If so,
this square should be numbered 3.
No. 5 is a square of 49 squares. KALTEPH. The Hebrew word for dog is
KLB. This square it will be noted is not a perfect acrostic.
No. 6 is a square of 64 squares. DISEEBEH is probably from ZABH = a
wolf. This square also is not at all perfect as an acrostic.
No. 7 is a square of 144 squares. ISICHADAMION, probably from DMIVN
= similitude of; and SIG, scoria or lava, or SQ, stone; root of SQL, to
stone.
195
THE TENTH CHAPTER

To hinder any necromantic or magical operations from
taking effect, except those of the Qabalah and of this
Sacred Magic.
(1) To undo any magic soever.
(2) To heal the bewitched.
(3) To make magical storms cease.
(4) To discover any magic.
(5) To hinder sorcerers from operating.
196
Notes to chapter X.
the guardian angel.
197
(b) MAGOTH executes the operations of this chapter.

(d) No especial instructions are given concerning this chapter.
(e) No. 1 consists of 17 squares containing 18 letters (LI of "Codselim"
occupying 1 square) taken from a square of 49 squares. CODSELIM and
COHABIM may be from KSILIM, the foolish ones, and KABIM, the
mourning ones (Hebrew).
No. 2. A border of 20 squares taken from a square of 36 squares.
LACHAT, perhaps from Hebrew LChSh = to enchant.
No. 3. A square of 81 squares. PARADILON, probably from Greek PARA,
against, and DEILON, perverse, or miserable, or unfortunate.
No. 4. A square of 25 squares. HORAH, from Hebrew ChRH, To be
enraged; Or HRH, to conceive, or bring forth.
No. 5. A square of 49 squares. MACANEH from Hebrew MChNH, a
fortification, castle, or defence. MADASUL, from MATzL, about me,
before me, at my side.
198

To cause all kinds of books to be brought to one, and
whether lost or stolen.
Notes to chapter XI.

the guardian angel.
(b) MAGOTH alone executes the operations of this chapter.
199
(d) Many ancient books of magic, etc., have been lost or destroyed, in
some cases by the wish of the good spirits, in others by the machinations
of the evil spirits. By these symbols you can have many supposed extinct
works brought to you, Abraham states; but adds that he could never copy
them, because the writing disappeared as fast as he wrote it;
notwithstanding this he was permitted to read some of them.
(e) No. 1 is a square of 16 squares. COLI, probably from Hebrew KLI,
meaning the whole, in the sense of the whole Universe.
No. 2 is a square of 36 squares. SEARAH, perhaps from Hebrew SORH,
a whirlwind; or perhaps from ShORH = terrible, and is also used to
express a kid, or a species of shaggy satyr-like demon, from the word
being used to signify hair.
KEHAHEK is probably from Hebrew KHCh, meaning to conceal, obscure,
or shut up.
200
THE TWELFTH CHAPTER

To know the secrets of any person.
(1) To know the secret of letters.
(2) To know the secret of words.
(3) To know secret operations.
(4) For the military counsels of a captain.
(5) To know the secrets of love.
(6) To know what riches a person possesseth.
(7) To know the secret of all arts.
201
202
Notes to chapter XII.

(a) The symbols of this chapter are manifested in part by the angels, and
in part also by the evil spirits.
(b) ASMODEUS alone executes the operations of this chapter.
(c) The familiar spirits can to an extent execute the operations of this
chapter.
(d) Touch the symbol, and name aloud the person whose secret you
desire to know, and the spirit will whisper the answer into your ear.
(e) No. 1 consists of 14 squares from a square of 49 squares. MEGILLA,
from Hebrew MGLH = to reveal or disclose.
No. 2 consists of 19 squares taken from a square of 49 squares.
MARCARA, perhaps from KRH to appear; Hebrew SIMBASI, perhaps
from BASh, evil, and ZMH, thought.
No. 3 consists of a gnomon of 13 from a square of 49 squares.
MAABHAD, from Hebrew MOBD = a deed or act.
203
No. 4 consists of 29 squares from a square of 81 squares. MILCHAMAH,

from Hebrew MLChMH = War. ADIRACHI from DRK (Hebrew) = way,
plan, idea. ELIM (Heb.) = mighty ones.
No. 5 consists of 25 taken from a square of 49 squares. CEDIDAH is
either from KDID = a spark, or from DID, the root of the words; love,
delights, breasts. DERARID from Hebrew DRR = liberty. HADIDEC from
DDIK = thy loves or delights.
No. 6 consists of 16 from a square of 36 squares. ASAMIN from Hebrew
ASMIM = treasure houses, garners. MAPIDE perhaps from PID =
oppression, misfortune.
No. 7. A gnomon of 13 from a square of 49 squares. MELABAH from
MLABH = art or science.
204
THE THIRTEENTH CHAPTER

To cause a dead body to revive, and perform all the
functions which a living person would do, and this during
a space of seven years, by means of the spirits.
(1) From the rising of the Sun until midday.
(2) From midday until the setting of the Sun.
(3) From the setting of the Sun until midnight.
(4) From midnight until the rising of the Sun.
205
Notes to chapter XIII.

(a) The symbols of this chapter are manifested in part by the angels and
in part by the evil spirits.
(b) ORIENS, PAYMON, ARITON, and AMAYMON, execute by means of
their servitors the operations of this chapter.
(d) In several places Abraham warns the reader that this is the most
difficult operation of any, because for it to be brought about, the
concurrence of all the chief spirits must be obtained. Watch for the
moment when the person dies, and then at once place upon his body
towards the cardinal points the symbol required. Similar symbols are to
be sewn into the garments he wears. Abraham moreover adds that by
this means, one can however only prolong the life for 7 years, and no
more.
(e) No. 1 is a square of 64 squares. EZECHIEL is from Hebrew IChZQAL,
the well-known name of the prophet, derived from ChZQ, to bind.
No. 2 is a square of 49 squares, it will be noticed that a small "o" is placed
at the end of each word in the last square towards the right hand.
AMIGDEL is from MGDL, a strong tower.
No. 3 is a square of 25 squares. IOSUA, the well-known Hebrew name,
signifies "he shall save".
No. 4 is also a square of 25 squares. PEGER is from PGR = a dead
inactive carcase whether of man or of beast.
206
THE FOURTEENTH CHAPTER

The twelve symbols for the twelve hours of the day and of the night, to
render oneself invisible unto every person.
207
208
Notes to chapter XIV.

(a) The symbols of this chapter be manifested in part by the evil spirits,
and in part by the good angels.
(b) MAGOT is said to rule the operations of this chapter.
(c) The familiar spirits do not execute the operations of this chapter.
(d) To render oneself invisible is said by Abraham to be a very easy
matter. This chapter contains twelve symbols for twelve different spirits
submitted unto the prince MAGOT, who are all of the same force. Place
the symbol upon the top of your head (under your head covering) and
then you will become invisible, while on taking it away you will appear
visible again.
(e) No. 1 is a square of 49 squares, whence 19 squares are taken which
are arranged somewhat in the form of a capital F. ALAMALA is probably
from the Greek, ALE wandering, and MELAS = black, darkness; i.e.,
wandering darkness.
No. 2 consists of 25 squares arranged somewhat in an F form, and taken
from the square of 49 squares. TSAPHAH is from TzPH = a covering or
shroud.
No. 3 is a square of 25 squares. CASAH implies "formed by coagulation".
209
No. 4 consists of 16 squares in an F form, taken from a square of 36

squares. ALATAH signifies "adhering closely".
CODER = darkness and obscurity.
No. 6 consists of 17 squares, somewhat irregularly disposed, taken from
a square of 36 squares. SIMLAH = "involved, to clothe or surround on all
sides".
CEHAH = restriction, and compression.
ANANA is a word expressing earnest desire for some then defect to be
supplied.
No. 9 consists of 19 taken from a square of 25 squares. TAMAN = "to
hide or conceal," and recalls the Biblical name of "Teman". NEDAC
means "accumulated darkness".
No. 10 is a gnomon of 13 squares from a square of 49 squares.
BEROMIN signifies "coverings or shrouds of concealment".
No. 11 is a border of 16 squares from a square of 25 squares. TALAC =
signifies "thy mists".
ALAMPIS is the Greek adjective ALAMPES, meaning "without the light of
the Sun". ISIL is Hebrew and means "he will dissolve".
It will be remarked that all these names distinctly express some idea
relating to invisibility.
210
THE FIFTEENTH CHAPTER

For the spirits to bring us anything we may wish to eat or to drink,
and even all (kinds of food) that we can imagine.
(1) For them to bring us bread.
(2) Meat.
(3) Wine of all kinds.
(4) Fish.
(5) Cheese.
211
Notes to chapter XV.

(b) ASMODEE and MAGOT together execute the operations of this
chapter.
(d) As for these symbols and all like ones appertaining unto this chapter,
when you shall wish to make use of them, you shall put them between
two plates, dishes, or jugs, closed together on the outside of a window;
and before a quarter of an hour shall have passed you will find and will
have that which you have demanded; but you must clearly understand
that with such kinds of viands you cannot nourish men for more than two
days. For this food although it be appreciable by the eyes, and by the
mouth, doth not long nourish the body, which hath soon hunger again,
seeing that this food gives no strength to the stomach. Know also that
none of these viands can remain visible for more than 24 hours, the which
period being passed, fresh ones will be requisite.
(e) This chapter naturally brings to one's mind the descriptions of the
magic feasts in the "Arabian Nights" and elsewhere.
212
No. 1 is a gnomon of 9 squares taken from a square of 25 squares. IAIIN

means "Let there be wine". Evidently therefore this square should be
numbered 3, instead of 1.
No. 2 consists of 10 squares taken from a square of 25 squares. BASAR
means "flesh".
No. 3 consists of 21 squares in the form of the Roman Capital letter E,
taken from a square of 36 squares. LECHEM means "bread," CNOHAH
implies "corn", and MECHEL means "a cake". Therefore this should
evidently be numbered 1, instead of 3. MECHEL also means "a window".
No. 4 is a square of 25 squares. DACAD should be spelt with a G instead
of a C; the meaning is "bring forth fish". CAMAC means "meal, or flour".
AFARA may be from the Greek adverb APHAR = "straightway or
forthwith" but if taken as a Hebrew root may mean "bring forth fruit".
No. 5 is a gnomon of 15 squares and 3 other supplementary ones taken
from a square of 64 squares. LEBHINAH is from LBA = "milk," and INH
"to squeeze".
213
THE SIXTEENTH CHAPTER

To find and take possession of all kinds of treasures,
provided that they be not at all (magically) guarded.
(1) For treasure of silver (or silver money).
(2) For gold money.
(3) For a great treasure.
(4) For a small treasure.
(5) For an unguarded treasure.
(6) For copper money.
(7) For gold in ingots.
(8) For silver in ingots.
(9) For jewels.
(10) For ancient medals (and coins).
(11) For a treasure hidden by a particular person.
(12) For pearls.
(13) For diamonds.
(14) For rubies.
(15) For Balassius rubies.
(16) For emeralds.
(17) For worked gold.
(18) For silver plate.
(19) For statues.
(20) For specimens of ancient art.
214
215
216
Notes to chapter XVI.

the guardian angel.
(b) ASTAROT and ARITON both execute the operations hereof by their
ministers, yet not together, but each separately.
(d) Select the symbol of the treasure desired, and the spirit will then shew
it to you. Then place the symbol at once upon the treasure, and it will no
longer be possible for it to disappear into the ground, nor for it to be
carried away. Furthermore any spirits which may be guarding it will thus
be put to flight, and you can then dispose of the treasure as you wish.
(e) No. 1 is a species of border of 28 squares of which 18 are occupied by
letters, taken from a square of 64 squares. TIPHARAH means "glory,
beauty, a shining thing". ITI is the Chaldaic for "is, are".
CESEP means "silver". This square should therefore probably be
numbered 1, or 8, or 18.
No. 3 consists of 24 squares from a square of 49 squares. SEGILAH
means "treasure".
No. 4 consists of 10 squares from a square of 25. NECOT means
probably stamped money.
217
No. 5 is a square of 25 squares. MAGOT is the name of one of the

subprinces.
No. 6 is a gnomon of 10 from a square of 16 squares. AGIL may mean "a
heap", but also "a globular drop of dew".
COSEN perhaps means "a golden cup".
No. 8 is a gnomon also of 9 squares taken from a square of 25 squares.
OTSAR means "restraint".
No. 9 is a square of 36 squares. BELIAL is the name of one of the four
great chiefs of the evil spirits.
No. 10 is a square of 25 squares. ORION, the celebrated mythological
name of the Greek hunter, and of the constellation, is perhaps used here
as the name of a spirit.
KERMA means either "a cutting off" or else "a superinducing".
No. 12 is a square of 16 squares.
No. 13 is a square of 49 squares. BICELON is perhaps from IHLM =
diamonds. The root IChL means "abiding strength and hardness".
No. 14 is a border of 12 squares from a square of 25 squares. SEGOR
means respectively "to break forth" and "to shut in", according as the root
begins with S or Sh.
No. 15 consists of 20 squares from a square of 49.
No. 16 is a square of 49 squares. ASTAROT is one of the eight
subprinces of the evil spirits.
No. 17 consists of 10 squares from a square of 25 squares. KONEH
means "possessions".
CAHIL means "gathered together".
218
No. 19 is a square of 36 squares. ARITON is one of the eight sub-princes

of the evil spirits.
No. 20 is a square of 36 squares. ORIMEL is evidently here used as the
name of a spirit. OIRIN is a Chaldaic word meaning angelic watchers over
the kingdoms of the Earth. ORION may also come from this word.
219
THE SEVENTEENTH CHAPTER

To fly in the air and travel any whither.
(1) In a black cloud.
(2) in a white cloud.
(3) In the form of an eagle.
(5)1 In the form of a crow (or raven).
(4) In the form of a vulture.
(6) In the form of a crane.
220
Notes to chapter XVII.

(b) ORIENS, PAIMON, ARITON, and AMAIMON execute the operations
(d) Name the place aloud to which you wish to travel, and place the
symbol upon your head under the bonnet or the hat; but take well heed
that it does not fall from you, which would be very dangerous. Do not as a
rule travel by night; and select a calm and serene day for the operation.
(e) No. 1 is a square of 25 squares. TASMA implies protection. TRMS is
the Hebrew word used in the verse, "Thou shalt go upon the lion and the
adder".
No. 2 consists of 8 squares taken from a square of 16. ANAN means
"great labour".
No. 3 is a square of 25 squares. HOLOP means "to travel".
No. 4 is a square of 16 squares. ODAC means "to pass on from one
place to another".
No. 5 is a square of 25 squares. ROLOR is perhaps from ROL "to move
hurriedly".
221
No. 6 is a square of 25 squares. NATSA means "to flee or fly quickly".
222
THE EIGHTEENTH CHAPTER

To heal divers maladies.
(1) To heal leprosy.
(2) For chapped hands, etc.
(3) For old ulcers.
(4) For pestilential diseases.
(5) For inveterate paralysis.
(6) For malignant fevers.
(7) For bodily pains.
(8) For sea sickness.
(9) For vertigo (and giddiness).
(10) For the "Miserere"1 (a most violent and dangerous kind of colic),
accompanied by dreadful vomiting.
(11) For dropsy.
(12) For all kinds of wounds.
223
224
Notes to chapter XVIII.

the guardian angel.
(b) AMAIMON performs the operations hereof.
(c) The familiar spirits can to an extent perform the operations of this
chapter.
(d) The bandages of the sick person having been undone and cleaned,
and the unguent, the compresses, and the bandages having been
replaced, put the symbol upon them and leave it for about a quarter of an
225
hour, then take it away, and keep it for use upon another occasion. But if
it be an internal malady, you must place the symbol (the written part
downwards) upon the bare head of the patient. These symbols may be
seen and examined without any danger, yet it is always better that they
should neither be seen nor handled by any other person than yourself.
(e) No. 1 consists of 20 squares taken from a square of 49 squares.
TSARAAT = "a stroke or plague; the leprosy".
No. 2 consists of 4 squares from a square of 16. BUAH signifies "to clear
away".
No. 3, a square of 64 squares. METSORAH signifies "flowing sores or
ulcers".
No. 4 is a square of 36 squares. RECHEM means "closely seizing".
No. 5 is a square of 25 squares. ROKEA signifies general evil.
No. 6 is a square of 25 squares. BETEM = "the internal parts".
No. 7 is a square of 36 squares. BEBHER = "in purifying or cleansing".
No. 8 is a square of 25 squares. ELEOS, the Greek word HALS = "the
sea from its saltness". ELOS means "calm still water".
No. 9 is a square of 49 squares. KADAKAT means "vertigo, turning of the
head".
No. 10 is a square of 49 squares. ROGAMOS from Latin Rogamus, "we
pray".
No. 11 is a square of 25 squares. SITUR means "secret".
No. 12 is a square of 36 squares. HAPPIR means "to shatter or break".
226
THE NINETEENTH CHAPTER

For every description of affection and love.
(1) To be beloved by one's wife (or husband).
(2) For some especial love.
(3) To be beloved by a relation.
(4) For a maiden in particular.
(5) To acquire the affection of a judge.
(6) To make oneself beloved by a married person.
(7) To make oneself beloved by a widow.
(8) By a girl already promised in marriage.
(9) By a maiden in general.
(10) By some especial prince.
(11) By some especial king.
(12) To obtain the friendship of some particular person.
(13) To have that of a great man.
(14) To be beloved by a woman.
(15) To make oneself beloved by ecclesiastics.
(16) To make oneself beloved by a master.
(17) To make oneself beloved by a mistress.
(18) To make oneself beloved by infidels.
(19) By the Pope, by an emperor,1 or by kings.
(20) For adulteries in general.
227
228
229
Notes to chapter XIX.

(b) Probably BELZEBUD performs this operation; as those of the
twentieth chapter are submitted to him; and these two chapters are
classed together by Abraham the Jew in his special instructions, the one
being the exact reverse of the other.
chapter.
230
(d) Name aloud the person or persons by whom you wish to be loved,
and move the symbol under whose class they come. But if it be not for
yourself that you are operating, but for two or more other persons,
whether for love or for hatred, you should still name such persons aloud,
and move the symbols of the class or classes under which they come.
Also, if possible, it is a good thing to touch them with the symbol, on the
bare skin, if you can.
Under this heading are included all classes of good-will and affection,
among the which Abraham says that the most difficult thing is to make
oneself or others beloved by religious persons.
(e) No. 1 is a gnomon of 9 squares taken from a square of 25. DODIM
means "loves, pleasures".
No. 2 consists of 17 squares arranged like a capital letter E taken from a
square of 25 squares. RAIAH means "a female companion".
No. 3 consists of 13 squares taken from a square of 25 squares. MODAH
= "adorned as for a bridal".
No. 5 consists of 29 squares taken from 49. ALMANAH = "a virgin";
hence evidently this should be numbered 4 and not 5, while probably
no. 4 should be here placed.
No. 6 consists of 26 squares taken from a square of 36 squares. CALLAH
means "a married woman, but especially a bride".
No. 7. A gnomon of 7 from a square of 16. ELEM means "a widow".
No. 8. A square of 25 squares. NAQID = "remote offspring".
No. 9. This has a strong likeness to the well-known SATOR, AREPO,
TENET, OPERA, ROTAS. It is a square of 25 squares. SALOM =
"peace".
AREPO = "he distils". LEMEL = "unto fulness". OPERA, "upon the dry
ground". MOLAS = "in quick motion," or perhaps better "stirring it up into
231
quickness, i.e., life". The former sentence is capable of a rather free Latin
translation, thus:
SATOR = The Creator.
AREPO = slow-moving.
TENET = maintains.
OPERA = his creations.
ROTAS = as vortices.
No. 10 is a square of 25 squares. DEBAM signifies "influential persons".
No. 11. Eight squares from a square of 16. AHHB signifies "to love".
BEAR signifies in Hebrew "to waste or consume".
No. 12. A square of 36 squares. IALDAH signifies "a girl".
No. 13 consists of 19 squares arranged like the capital letter F, and taken
from a square of 49 squares. BETULAH = a virgin.
No. 14 consists of 25 squares from a square of 49. IEDIDAH is from a
Hebrew root, signifying objects of love. DILOQAH means "to eagerly
pursue, or to burn as with a fever". DOQARCA = "pierced".
No. 15. Twelve squares from a square of 25. SAQAL means "a wise
person".
No. 16. A square of 36 squares. QEBHIR = "a protector".
No. 17. 14 squares from a square of 25. EFEHA means "passionate".
No. 18. A gnomon of 11 from a square of 36. TAAFAH = "to join together,
to connect".
No. 19 is a gnomon of 9 squares from one of 25 squares. SARAH means
"powerful, high in authority".
No. 20 is also a gnomon of 9 squares from a square of 25 squares.
CATAN = "to adhere closely".
232
THE TWENTIETH CHAPTER

To excite every description of hatred and enmity, discords, quarrels,
contentions, combats, battles, loss, and damage.
(1) To excite quarrels and fights.
(2) For enmity in general.
(3) For enmities of kings and of the great.
(4) For particular enmities.
(5) For enmities among women.
(6) To cause a general war.
(7) To render anyone unfortunate in combat.
(8) To put discord in an army.
(9) For a particular discord.
(10) To sow discord among ecclesiastics.
(11) For every description of vengeance.
(12) To cause battles, losses, etc.
233
234
Notes to chapter XX.

(b) BELZEBUD performs the operations hereof.
(d) See instructions for chapter XIX, which serve equally for that, and the
present operation.
(e) No. 1 consists of 19 squares irregularly arranged, and taken from a
square of 25 squares. KANNA means "jealous".
No. 2 consists of 13 squares from a square of 25 squares. SELAK = "to
cast down or prostrate".
No. 3 consists of 18 squares from a square of 25. ROQEN = implies
"persons in power".
No. 4 consists of 25 squares from a square of 49. ATLITIS is a corruption
of the Greek adjective ATLETOS = "insufferable, not to be borne".
235
No. 5 consists of 19 squares from a square of 49. OTSAMAH = "bodily

strength".
No. 6 consists of 21 from a square of 25. SINAH = "hatred".
No. 7 is a gnomon of 9 squares from a square of 25. SATAN is the name
of one of the chief evil spirits and has been elsewhere explained.
No. 8 consists of 19 squares in the form of a capital F, taken from a
square of 49 squares. LOFITOS is evidently from the Greek LOPHESIS,
meaning "rest, cessation from action (i.e. in this case military action)".
No. 9 consists of 13 squares arranged in the form of an F, and taken from
a square of 25 squares. GIBOR = "strength, might, severity".
No. 10 is a square of 25 squares. NOKAM = "vengeance".
No. 11 is also a square of 25 squares. KELIM = "for all kinds of things".
No. 12 consists of 25 squares from a square of 49. KERABAH, "assault,
attack".
236
THE TWENTY-FIRST CHAPTER

To transform oneself, and take different faces and forms.
(1) To appear old.
(2) To take on the appearance of an old woman.
(3) To appear young.
(4) To transform oneself into a girl.
(5) To appear like a young child.
237
Notes to chapter XXI.

(a) The symbols of this chapter are manifested only by the evil spirits.
(b) MAGOT performs the operations hereof.
(d) This is rather a fascination than anything else. Take the symbol
desired in your left hand and stroke the face therewith. Abraham further
observes that such an operation performed by an ordinary magician
would be easily seen through by the possessor of the Sacred Magic;
while on the contrary this latter would be safe from detection by ordinary
sorcerers.
(e) The student will note in these squares the marked position of the letter
Q, as in many other cases where the effect aimed at seems to be rather a
deception of the senses of others.
238
No. 1 consists of 16 squares from a square of 25. ZAKEN means "old".

No. 2 is a gnomon of 16 squares with the letter Q added; from a square of
72 squares. DISKENAH = "in the likeness of an old woman". It is to be
remarked that this square is rather oblong, 8 squares long by 9 deep.
No. 3 consists of 20 squares from a square of 49. DISAKAN means "to
cover up or hide", but were it DISAKAR it would mean "as if one young".
No. 4 consists of 10 squares from a square of 25 squares. IONEK means
"thy dove".
No. 5 consists of 16 squares from a square of 25. BACUR = "a firstborn".
239
THE TWENTY-SECOND CHAPTER

This chapter is only for evil, for with the symbols herein
we can cast spells, and work every kind of evil; we should
not avail ourselves hereof.
(1) To cast spells upon men.
(2) To bewitch beasts.
(3) To cast a spell upon the liver.
(4) This symbol should never be made use of.
(5) To cast a spell upon the heart.
(6) Upon the head and other parts of the body.
240
Notes to chapter XXII.

(b) BELZEBUD performs the operations hereof.
(d) Abraham warns strongly against use being made of this operation.
The symbols should be either buried or concealed in places where the
persons we wish to harm are likely to pass by; or, if possible, we can
touch them with the symbol.
(e) No. 1 consists of 17 from a square of 49 squares. QELADIM means
"those who creep in insidiously".
No. 2 consists of 19 squares from a square of 49 squares. BEHEMOT =
"beasts".
No. 3 consists of 18 squares from a square of 49. MEBASIM = "those that
stamp down violently".
No. 4 is a square of 25 squares. CASED, Hebrew (if used in a bad sense)
= "overflowing of unrestrained lust". AZOTE, Hebrew = "enduring".
BOROS, =Greek = "devouring, gluttonous". ETOSA, = Greek "idle,
useless". DEBAC, = Hebrew = "to overtake and stick close".
241
No. 5 consists of 14 squares from a square of 36. LEBHAH implies,

"agony at the heart".
No. 6 consists of 17 squares. QARAQAK, "thy baldness," also "thy
rending asunder".
242
THE TWENTY-THIRD CHAPTER

To demolish buildings and strongholds.
(1) To make a house fall to the ground.
(2) To destroy a town.
(3) To demolish strongholds.
(4) To ruin possessions (and estates).
Notes to chapter XXIII.

(a) The symbols of this chapter are manifested by the evil spirits only.
(b) ASTAROT performs the operations hereof.
243
chapter.
(d) No especial instructions are given regarding this chapter by Abraham
the Jew.
NAVEH means "a house or habitation".
No. 2 consists of 12 squares from a square of 25. QAQAH = "to make
void or empty".
No. 3 consists of 15 squares from a square of 49 squares. COMAHON
means "a stronghold".
No. 4 consists of a gnomon of 16 squares from a square of 36 squares.
BINIAM means "in affliction".
244
THE TWENTY-FOURTH CHAPTER

To discover any thefts that hath occurred.
(1) Jewels stolen.
(2) Money.
(3) Worked gold.
(4) Silver workmanship.
(5) Effects, such as furniture.
(6) Horses, and other animals.
245
Notes to chapter XXIV.

(b) ARITON performs the operations hereof; and MAGOT also; but
separately.
chapter.
(d) No especial instructions are given by Abraham regarding this chapter.
(e) No. 1 consists of 22 squares taken from a square of 49 squares. The
meaning of KIXALIS is not apparent.
No. 2 consists of 16 squares from a square of 49. QENEBAH probably
conveys the idea of gain or possession.
No. 3 consists of 35 squares from a square of 81 squares. QEDESELAN
may signify things of value set apart.
No. 6 (the succession of numbers here is irregular) consists of 14 squares
from a square of 25 squares. MOREH means "to rebel against, to
disobey".
No. 5 consists of a square of 25 squares. CARAC means "to involve or
wrap up," also "garments, etc.".
246

TALAH means "a young lamb," or "kid," according to whether its root
terminates with Aleph or He.
247
THE TWENTY-FIFTH CHAPTER

To walk upon, and operate under, water.
(1) To swim for twenty-four hours without becoming wearied.
(2) To remain under water for hours.
(3) To rest upon the water for twenty-four hours.
Notes to chapter XXV.

(a) The symbols of this chapter are manifested only by the angel, or by
the guardian angel.
248
(b) Abraham does not state to what prince this operation is submitted.
NAHARIAMA means "a river of waters".
No. 2 is a square of 64 squares.
No. 3 is a gnomon of 9 squares from a square of 25 squares. MAIAM =
"abundant waters such as the sea".
249
THE TWENTY-SIXTH CHAPTER

To open every kind of lock, without a key, and without
making any noise.
(1) To open doors.
(2) To open padlocks.
(3) To open larders (or charnel-houses).
(4) To open strong-boxes (or caskets).
(5) To open prisons.
250
Notes to chapter XXVI.

(b) AMAIMON and ARITON together perform the operations of this
chapter.
(d) Touch the lock you wish to open with the side of the symbol which is
written upon, and it will immediately open without noise or injury. When
you wish to reclose it touch it with the side of the symbol not written upon,
and it will refasten and shew no trace of having been opened.
SAGUB signifies "exalted" or "lifted up" (as an ancient portcullis might
be).
No. 2 consists of 13 squares taken from a square of 25 squares. RATOK
means "a confining chain wreathed or fastened round anything".
251

BARIACA = "a place for food to be put".
No. 4 consists of 13 squares from a square of 25. SEQOR may mean
either "to satisfy" or "to deal falsely," according as it is spelt with Q or K
252
THE TWENTY-SEVENTH CHAPTER

To cause visions to appear.
(1) To make trellis-work to be seen.
(2) A superb palace.
(3) Flowering meadows.
(4) Lakes and rivers.
(5) Vines with their grapes.
(6) Great fires.
(7) Divers mountains.
(8) Bridges and rivers.
(9) Woods and various kinds of trees.
(10) Cranes.
(11) Giants.
(12) Peacocks.
(13) Gardens.
(14) Wild boars.
(15) Unicorns.
(16) Beautiful country.
(17) A fruit garden (or orchard).
(18) A Garden with all kinds of flowers.
(19) To cause snow to appear.
(20) Different kinds of wild animals.
(21) Towns and castles.
(22) Various flowers.
(23) Fountains and clear springs (of water).
(24) Lions.
(25) Singing birds.
(26) Horses.
(27) Eagles.
(28) Buffaloes.
(29) Dragons.
(30) Hawks and falcons.
(31) Foxes.
(32) Hares.
(33) Dogs.
(34) Gryphons.
(35) Stags.
253
254
255
256
257
258
Notes to chapter XXVII.

(a) The symbols of this chapter are only manifested by the evil spirits.
(b) ORIENS, PAIMON, ARITON, and AMAIMON, execute the operations
hereof by the means of their common ministers.
chapter.
SELAC means "to cast down," "to cut down or fell" (as trees). Perhaps
thus signifying the cut wood with which a trellis is made.
No. 2 consists of 13 squares from a square of 25 squares. HESEB may
mean the environs of a place.
No. 3 consists of 19 squares from a square of 49 squares. AODONIA,
from Hebrew root ODN "Eden, a delightful place, etc.".
No. 4 is a square of 49 squares. ATSARAH = either "a store-house or
treasury" or "to flow," according to its derivation.
No. 5 consists of 15 squares from a square of 49. AGAMAGA = "pools of
water" whence this should probably be numbered 4 instead of 5.
No. 6 consists of 18 squares taken from a square of 25 squares. SELEG
= "snow," whence perhaps this should be numbered 19 instead of 6.
No. 7 (the order of the numbering of the squares is here changed)
consists of 10 squares taken from a square of 25 squares. SOREK
means "to wind about".
No. 8 consists of 19 squares from a square of 81 squares. AKROPOLIS
is a Greek word signifying "citadel".
259
No. 9 consists of 10 squares from a square of 25 squares. CAIOT is

probably from CHAIOTH = "living creatures". It may also mean a covert,
where living creatures abide. Perhaps it should be numbered 20.
No. 10 consists of 11 squares taken from a square of 25 squares. IAQEB
probably means a bird of the crane species.
MELUNAC = "Thy dwelling-place," and perhaps this should be numbered
21.
No. 12 consists of 11 squares taken from a square of 25 squares. PERAC
may mean "flowering gardens". Perhaps this should be numbered 13.
KIKAION = "a place where gourds grow".
No. 14 is a gnomon of 11 squares from a square of 36 squares. OLELAH
may mean "horned animals" or "tusked animals".
MAKOR = "places digged".
MIGIRAS = "a place where productive plants grow".
No. 18 consists of 12 squares from a square of 36 squares. ESAHEL =
"rich".
No. 19 should probably be numbered 24. It is a gnomon of 9 from a
square of 25 squares. ARIEH = "a lion".
No. 20 consists of 19 from a square of 49 squares. LIMIKOS = "savage
(animals)".
No. 21 consists of 13 squares from a square of 25 squares. SASAS
probably means "horses," and this square should probably be numbered
26 instead of 21.
260

KIKIMIS = "thistles" and also "some kinds of flowers".
No. 23 consists of 15 squares from a square of 49 squares. NESIKER
signifies fluids of various kinds.
No. 24 consists of 9 squares from a square of 25. DOBIH = "a bear," and
should evidently be otherwise numbered.
No. 25 consists of 14 squares from a square of 49 squares.
No. 26 is a gnomon of 9 squares from a square of 25 squares. PARAH =
"a heifer", but also "fruit, produce".
No. 28 consists of 10 squares from a square of 25. FANIN is probably
from BN, and meaning "towns and villages," whence this should probably
be numbered 21.
No. 29 consists of 8 squares from a square of 16. REEM "unicorns", and
also beasts of the beeve kind, buffaloes, etc. Perhaps this square
answers for 15 as well.
AIIAH = rapacious birds.
No. 31 consists of 10 squares from a square of 25. SUHAL means "a
blackish lion," whence this square should be numbered 24 probably.
No. 32 consists of 18 squares from a square of 49. GIRIPES may mean
"small beasts that run swiftly".
No. 33 consists of 10 squares from a square of 25. ARNEP should
probably be ARNEB. It means "a hare," whence this square should
perhaps be numbered 32.
No. 34 is a gnomon of 9 squares from a square of 25. AIIAL probably
means "wild goats".
261
No. 35 consists of 12 squares from 25. KELEF = "a dog," whence this
Square should probably be numbered 33.
262
THE TWENTY-EIGHTH CHAPTER

To have as much gold and silver as one may wish, both to
provide for one's necessities, and to live in opulence.
(1) To have coined gold.
(2) To have coined silver.
(3) To have silver in small coins.
(4) To have small change in copper (or bronze).
Notes to chapter XXVIII.

the guardian angel.
(b) ORIENS alone performs this operation.
263
chapter.
(d) Place the symbol of the money you require in your purse, let it remain
there for a short time, then put your right hand into your purse, and you
will there find seven pieces of the class of money you have wished for.
This operation should not be performed more than three times in the day.
The pieces of money you do not use will disappear, which is why you
should not ask for several kinds of money at the same time. And if you
spend it, both you and those into whose hands it passes will find it
genuine.
In another place Abraham says, that once only in your life you may ask
your guardian angel for a large sum of money sufficient to represent a
fortune; and that he himself had done so and obtained his request.
(e) No. 1 consists of 17 from a square of 25 squares. SEQOR perhaps
here means money.
No. 2 consists of 10 squares from a square of 25. KESER may mean "a
collection or heap".
No. 3 consists of 19 squares from a square of 25. PESEP should be
probably BESPR = "much, many".
No. 4 is a gnomon of 9 squares from 25. MATBA probably means "let it
be forthcoming, bring forth".
264
THE TWENTY-NINTH CHAPTER

To cause armed men to appear.
(1) To cause an army to appear.
(2) Armed men for one's defence.
(3) To cause a siege to appear.
265
Notes to chapter XXIX.

(b) ORIENS, PAIMON, ARITON, and AMAIMON, execute the operations
hereof by the means of their common ministers. PAIMON also performs
this operation alone.
(d) No especial instructions are given by Abraham regarding this chapter,
by which Abraham says (in the first book) that he himself had caused
armed men to appear.
(e) No. 1 is a gnomon of 13 squares from a square of 49 squares.
MACANEH = "an encampment".
No. 2 consists of 19 squares from a square of 81. MAHARACAH perhaps
means "an ambuscade".
No. 3 consists of 21 squares from a square of 81 squares.
266
THE THIRTIETH CHAPTER

To cause comedies, operas, and every kind of music and
dances to appear.
(1) To cause all kinds of music to be heard.
(2) Music and extravagant balls.
(3) For all kinds of instruments to be played.
(4) For comedies, farces and operas.
End of the Symbols
267
Notes to chapter XXX.

(b) MAGOT performs the operations hereof.
chapter.
(e) No. 1 consists of 18 squares from a square of 49 squares. NAGINAH
= a stringed instrument".
MEKOLAH = "singing".
No. 3 is a gnomon of 13 squares from a square of 49 squares. NIGIGIN =
"musical instruments," probably.
No. 4 consists of 21 squares from a square of 49 squares. MECASEF
means "enchantment".
This finishes the list of symbols set down by Abraham the Jew, the which
I have given in their entirety; but I must of my own initiative warn any who
may endeavour to use these signs, that unless animated by the purest
and best motives they will find them react terribly against them; and that,
if the preliminary period of six months' preparation advocated by AbraMelin be not observed, the symbols will be practically worthless in their
hands; for, as will be observed, the names in the squares for the most
part are simply the statement of the ends desired to be accomplished
thereby.
Finally, I will quote the following passage from the Key of Solomon the
King
"ACCURSED BE HE WHO TAKETH THE NAME OF GOD IN VAIN!
ACCURSED BE HE WHO USETH THIS KNOWLEDGE UNTO AN EVIL
END. BE HE ACCURSED IN THIS WORLD AND IN THE WORLD TO
COME. AMEN. BE HE ACCURSED IN THE NAME WHICH HE HATH
BLASPHEMED!"
268
ESSENTIAL REMARKS UPON THE FOREGOING SYMBOLS.

It is certain that among all the symbols which I have hereinbefore written
down there be many which one can employ for evil (purposes); and I
avow that (at first) I intended not to give them here at all; but thereafter I
did make reflection in myself that I was working no evil; for often the
secret judgments of God permit disgrace, hindrances, infirmities, and
other vexing accidents to happen unto mortals, either to awake them from
the lethargy wherein they be sunk so that they recognise not their
Creator, or else to give them an opportunity by their afflictions of
increasing their merit. And although God can in no way do evil, but
always good, nevertheless we cannot deny that occasionally He
permitteth the Secondary Causes to act. Now the executioners and
executors of the divine justice be the evil spirits. Whence I conclude that
although it may be in no sense advisable to work operations for evil, yet
that there may arise, however, certain cases which do admit of and permit
the same; as (for example) when it is necessary to save and defend one's
own life, or to avert some great scandal or evil, or to prevent offensive
acts which might be done against oneself, or to displease God and hurt
one's neighbour, as well as in just wars, and other like cases. Yet it is
always best in such instances to govern yourself according to the counsel
of your holy guardian angel. I have also written these for the reason that
God hath given unto Man free Will both in merit and demerit; for, further,
having finished the operation, if thou shouldest wish (which I pray God not
to permit)1 to operate for evil and to abuse the grace which God hath
granted thee, the spirits would be only too ready to give and manifest
unto thee the symbols, and will grant willingly unto thee all that thou shalt
demand of them. Concerning this matter I repeat unto thee, fear the Lord,
love him, and respect his commandments with a good heart, and thou
shalt live happy and contented upon Earth.
If thou considerest maturely what be the essential points of this operation,
thou shalt find that the first point is to make a firm, veritable, and real
resolution to live in a truly edifying condition of modesty, and in
retirement, as far as it shall be possible for thee so to do. For solitude is
the source of many blessings, such as, to give oneself up to prayer, and
unto the contemplation of things divine; to flee evil conversations and
occasions of sin; to live in oneself; and to accustom oneself to continuing
a life of such regularity. For if one were to go to present oneself before a
king, what would one not do to appear before him with splendour and
magnificence; and what diligence and care would not one put in practice
269
to prepare oneself hereunto. Now we must understand that the enjoyment

and vision of the angels of the Lord be infinitely above the princes of
Earth, who in fact are but a vanity, a shadow, and vile dust of Earth. Now
if to please these mortal princes one would almost commit idolatries; what
ought one not to do to appear before the holy angels of God who
represent the grandeur of the majesty of God. Let each one hold for a
thing, sure and certain that the grace which the Lord granteth unto us in
giving us this sacred science by the means and intermediation of his holy
angels is so great that none can fitly express it.
It is certain that having obtained this sacred wisdom thou mayest dispose
of it and communicate it unto three friends; but thou must not exceed this
sacred number of the ternary, for in such case thou wouldest be
altogether deprived of it. One of the most meritorious deeds in the sight of
the Lord, is to share with one's neighbour the goods which God hath
given unto us; yet must we take note of that which God commanded unto
Moses, when he ordered him to give the operation unto Aaron his brother,
namely that he should receive as the symbol of an offering ten golden
florins, the which he should distribute unto seventy-two poor persons with
his own hands, obliging them to repeat the Psalms which I have already
mentioned in the second book, and which should be of the number of
seventy-wwo. For if he who receiveth this operation should not perform
this alms, the operation would be void of value for him. Thou, not yet
having the authority to give it, without having received the ten golden
florins, thou must act like Moses, unto whom the Lord granted it on this
condition, for him to give it unto his brother Aaron.
I have also described the precautions which we must take before granting
this sacred science unto any; and I repeat here that at least six months
should transpire during which we should frequently test, and seek by
conversations to sound, the inclinations of him unto whom we may be
willing to give it; so as to know whether he be a reliable person, and also
the object for which he demandeth and is anxious to obtain this Science.
Now shouldest thou perceive that such an one is light and inconstant, and
that he hath only vague ideas, and habits and manners which be not
good, then shalt thou temporise with him for a time, so as to bring up
causes, occasions, or pretexts, so as not to give it unto him, even
shouldest thou already have promised it to him. For it is better to undergo
the displeasure of a mortal man than that of an eternal God, from whom
thou hast received so great a grace. I have, however, myself made trial
hereof, for to my great wonderment (once upon a time) when I was
270
thinking that I was putting it to good use in giving it unto a certain person
for whom I had great respect; God himself intervened and did not permit
my intention to be carried out, for that person began of his own accord to
wonder whether the matter were true or no, and he doubted it much,
believing that it was a fable, and did not have an entire faith therein; and
he made me comprehend by his discourse that he was not such an one
as I had thought. Furthermore it happened that he fell dangerously ill, and
I in my turn was reprimanded by my Angel who blamed me for the choice
I had made. The whole machinery of the Universe is maintained by faith;
and he who believeth not, suffereth the chastisement of his perfidy both in
this world and in the next. I could here say much more relating to our own
selves, but as thou wilt have to pass under the influence of thy holy
guardian angel, thou wilt be sufficiently instructed in his own good time,
and by himself, concerning these matters which be both delicate and to
be jealously guarded.
The Evil Spirit is so subtle, so keen, and so cunning, that that which he
cannot obtain at the time of the Conjuration, he will seek to have on other
occasions in offering thee his services. This is why the very first action to
take especially with thy familiar spirits, should be to command them,
never to say anything unto thee of themselves, but only to speak when
thou shalt interrogate them, unless it were to warn thee of matters which
concern either thine advantage or thine hurt. For if thou dost not limit their
liberty of speech they will tell thee so many and so important things, that
they will completely overcloud thine understanding, and thou wilt not
know what to believe, so that in the confusion of ideas they could make
thee prevaricate, and perhaps fall into irretrievable error. Never make
thyself to be greatly entreated in any matter wherein thou canst aid and
succour thy neighbour, and do not wait until he demandeth assistance
from thee, but seek to know to the full his need even though it be
concealed, and give him prompt aid. Also trouble not thyself as to
whether he be Turk, pagan,or idolater, but do good unto all those who
believe in a God. Be especially charitable towards those who are in
extreme want, prisoners, or sick, and let thine heart be touched, and
succour them generously; for God taketh pleasure in beholding the poor
succoured.
In the twenty-eighth chapter where it is treated of the way to have silver
and gold sufficient to supply one's needs on occasion; thou must know
that the quantity of gold or of silver of which thou hast then actually need,
will be at once brought unto thee, and thou canst use it for this occasion
271
only. And if thou usest it not within the twenty-four hours, this sum will
disappear and thou wilt no longer be able to avail thyself of it. Think not,
however, that this gold is but a phantasy, for if thou effectually expendest
it, and dost not endeavour to hoard the same, he who shall receive it from
thine hands can enjoy the same and expend it according unto his desire,
and the money will be real both for him and for others.
For once only mayest thou demand of thine holy angel the amount of gold
and of silver which thou shalt judge suitable unto thine estate and
conditions. My possessions were few, and I demanded of mine angel
three thousand thousand golden florins, and they were granted unto me.
Later I made such good use of the sacred science, and I understood so
well how to augment my goods, that at the present time, after having
married three daughters unto each of whom I gave a hundred thousand
(golden florins), as thou wilt see by the testament which I have made, I
am leaving in current money more than a million golden florins, besides a
large quantity of very valuable furniture. Had I been of noble birth I might
have demanded much more and have profited less. When anyone
demanded of me: "Eh! How have you managed to gain so much?" I would
reply thereto that it is a fine thing to know by certain knowledge how much
such or such a thing is worth here, and how much it is worth elsewhere,
that this year, wheat, barley, and other crops, will be cheap in Italy, and
dear in France, etc., etc.; and that commerce well managed, enricheth
any one.
As for what concerneth the manner of treating and commanding the
spirits, it is an easy thing unto whomsoever walketh by the proper paths;
and it is a very difficult thing for whomsoever through ignorance
submitteth himself unto them. I have heard say that there be some men
who pass for being famous herein, such as a certain blind man D'Acali, a
certain Bearli, a Peter D'Abano, and many others. Ah! how many of them
do but deceive themselves! I do not say that these men did not perform
extraordinary things; but it is necessary to note their manner of working,
for their science is imperfect, and their authority proceedeth not from God
by the intermediation of his holy angels, but proceedeth directly from
express pacts made with the Devil, and (acteth) by means of consecrated
books full of thousands of diabolical conjurations and impious Exorcisms;
in one word things which be contrary unto the commandments of God
and the peace of men. And with all this their operations be destined for
certain times and hours, and finally the demon carrieth away with him
their miserable Souls, which thing arriveth only too often. And yet it is the
272
science of these persons which causeth them to pass for famous wise
men.
In the first book I have made mention of those whom I had encountered in
my journeyings in Europe. The true commandment is that which
dependeth from God, and in which there is no dependence placed on any
spirit imaginable, for in employing them, if you make unto them the least
submission, the slightest prayer, or honour, you are rendering yourselves
their slaves, and they are in no way submitted unto you. The spirits have
so great knowledge that they comprehend very well by our actions what
dispositions we have, and understand our inclinations, so that from the
very beginning they prepare the way to make us to fail. If they know that a
man is inclined unto vanity and pride, they will humiliate themselves
before him, and push that humility unto excess, and even unto idolatry,
and this man will glory herein and become intoxicated with conceit, and
the matter will not end without his commanding them some pernicious
thing of such a nature that ultimately thence from will be derived that sin
which will make the man the slave of the demon. Another man will be
easily accessible to avarice, and then if he take not heed the malignant
spirits will propose unto him thousands of ways of accumulating wealth,
and of rendering himself rich by indirect and unjust ways and means,
whence total restitution is afterwards difficult and even impossible, so that
he who is in such case findeth himself ever the slave of the spirits.
Another will be a man of letters; the spirits will inspire him with
presumption, and he will then believe himself to be wiser even than the
Prophets, furthermore they will endeavour to lead him astray in subtle
points in matters appertaining unto God, and will make (that man) fall into
a thousand errors, the which afterwards when he wisheth to support he
will very frequently deny God, and his high mysteries. The causes and
matters whereof (the spirits) will make use to cause a man to waver are
infinite, especially when the man attempteth to make them submit to his
commands, and this is why it is most necessary to be upon one's guard
and to distrust oneself.
The true Commandment will be that which will be given when he who
commandeth shall have maturely reflected and considered who he is in
himself, and who he is who should serve and obey him. And if a mortal
man not having on his side the support of the power and will of the Lord
shall have sufficient force to command the spirits and to constrain them to
obey him; (they, namely) who have the same virtue and power, which
God hath granted unto them, they having lost nothing hereof; and they
273
also being spirits from God and herein differing from thee who art drawn
from the mire, as gold is from lead; and that their sin is notorious, for the
which they were chased from Heaven; figure also unto thyself, that a
Spirit which of his own nature is all vanity, would not be likely to submit
himself unto thee without a superior force (compelling him), neither would
he wish to obey thee nor to serve thee. He who shall reflect and reason
upon these particulars will know that all things come unto us from God,
and that it is he who wisheth and commandeth that the evil spirits should
be submitted unto us.
If then all things depend from the Lord, upon whom wilt thou, man, base
thyself so as to be capable of thyself (alone) to dominate the spirits? It is
certain that such an enterprise cannot succeed without the loss of thine
own soul. Then it is by the virtue of that God Who hath submitted them
under thy feet, that thou shalt command them, as will be precisely
ordained unto thee by thy holy angel. "Donec ponam inimicos tuos
scabellum Pedum tuorum." "Until I shall make thy foes thy footstool." (Ps.
109:1.) Also do not familiarise thyself with them; for they be not little pet
dogs. Adopt a serious tone and an air of authority, make them obey thee,
and be well ware of accepting the least offer which they shall make unto
thee of themselves; and treat them as their master, also without occasion
thou shalt never molest them, and order them to execute thy commands
from point to point without adding or diminishing in any way imaginable.
And when thou canst employ inferior spirits (in a matter), thou shalt in no
way make thy requests unto the superiors. Also seeing that all have not
the same powers, thou shalt take heed not to command unto one (spirit) a
thing appertaining unto (the office of) another; and because it would be
impossible for me to here write down in full the quality, virtue, and office
of each spirit, thou shouldest search this out for thyself and sharpen thy
faculties; and in the first demand which thou shalt make unto the four
spirits (who are) the supreme princes, and unto the eight sub-princes;
thou shalt demand the most skilful of the spirits, of whom thou shalt make
a register for convenience of the practice which I describe unto thee in
this third book where also thou wilt find the symbols of many spirits.
But seeing that the subjects of various erring humours (of mind) and other
occasions which arise daily be diverse, each man will procure for himself
those (spirits) which be of his nature and genius and fit for that wherein
thou wouldest employ them. And when thou shalt find an extreme
resistance unto operating, on the part of any spirit, after that thou shalt
have given him the necessary instructions, and that he cannot execute
274
that which thou hast commanded him; in such case thou shalt convoke
the superior spirits and demand of them others which may be better
capable of serving thee in thy need. And in all cases thou shalt avail
thyself of the power and command of thy holy angel.
Keep ever continually before thine eyes the fear of God; and seek to obey
his commandments, and those of thy holy angel, ever retain in thine heart
his holy instructions; never submit thyself unto the evil spirits in the
slightest degree even should it seem to be to thine own advantage and
unto that of thy neighbour (so to do). For the rest, be certain that they will
obey thee so perfectly and really, that there will be no operation however
great or difficult it may be, that thou shalt not bring unto a glorious
termination, the which I myself also have done. As regardeth the service
which thou shouldest render unto thy neighbour in his necessities, thou
shouldest perform it with zeal, and in no sense wait for him to ask it of
thee, and seek also to comprehend his needs unto the uttermost, so as to
be able to take sound action (therein). Thou shalt take heed to succour
the infirm and the sick and to work for their healing; and see that thou
dost not good works to attract praises and to make thyself talked of in the
world.
Also thou mayest make semblance of performing (thy cures) by prayers,
or by ordinary remedies, or by (the recital of) some Psalm, or by other like
means.
Thou shouldest be especially circumspect not to discover the like matters
unto reigning princes; and in this particular thou shalt do nothing without
consulting thy good angel; for there is a certain generation which is never
contented, and besides that which ariseth from simple curiosity, these
princes regard such (action) as a duty and obligation. Also it is a certain
fact that he who possesseth this Sacred Magic, hath no need whatever of
them. Further they are naturally inclined to ask of thee always things
prejudicial, the which if granted by thee would offend the Lord, and if not
they become your declared enemies. Now my opinion (is that it) would be
always (preferable) to render them what services you can from a
distance.
There is nothing which is so pleasing unto the angels as to demand
knowledge from them, and for my part I think there is no greater pleasure
than that of becoming wise when one learneth from such masters.
275
I both have exhorted, and do exhort unto a solitary life, which is the
source of all good; it is true that it is difficult to accustom oneself
thereunto; but once thou shalt have obtained the sacred science and
magic the love for retirement will come unto thee of thine own accord, and
thou wilt voluntarily shun the commerce with and conversation of men; for
the pleasure and contentment thou wilt enjoy when thou shalt be the
possessor of this science will be so great that thou wilt despise all
amusements, excursions, riches, and every other thing however attractive
such may be.
For once only will it be permissible to obtain property and goods
proportionate unto thy degree and estate; the which afterwards are to be
used by spending them liberally for thine own needs and those of thy
neighbour, sharing with him in his necessity the good things which God
shall have given (unto thee); for he who should employ these for evil ends
shall render himself incapable of obtaining from God any other grace and
benefit.
The child which one should choose for greater surety and success in (the
acquisition of) this sacred science should be born of a legitimate
marriage, and its father and mother should be also legitimate. It should be
from six to seven years of age, vivacious, and witty; it should have a clear
speech and pronounce well. Thou shalt prepare it some time before
commencing the operation and have it ready when the time requireth. I
myself am of opinion that there should be two (children) in case of any
accident which might happen, through sickness, or death, or other like
(hindrance). Thou shalt gain it over to thee by giving it puerile things to
amuse it, and have it ready when necessary, but in no way tell it anything
of what it is to serve for, so that if it be questioned by its parents it can tell
them nothing. And if it be a well-behaved child, it is all the better. We may
be certain that by this means we can arrive at the possession of the
Sacred Science; for where he who operateth faileth, the innocence of the
child supplieth (that which is wanting); and the holy angels are much
pleased with its purity. We should not admit women into this operation.
All the clothes and other things which have been used during the period
of the six Moons, you should preserve, if you intend to continue in the
same house wherein thou hast performed the operation, because they be
always good. But if thou dost not intend to use them more, nor yet the
oratory, thou shalt burn them all, and bury the ashes in a secret place.
It is now necessary to give unto thee a little light, and declare unto thee
276
the quality and value of the spirits, and in what thou canst exactly employ
them with surety of success. Thou must however take note that each
Spirit hath a great quantity of Inferior Spirits which be submitted unto him.
Also I wish to say that as regardeth things base, vile, and of little
importance the Superior Spirit will not execute them, but will cause them
to be executed by his Inferiors with all punctuality. And this mattereth not
unto him who operateth provided that his commands be fulfilled, and that
he be punctually obeyed.
THE ORDER OF THE FIRST HIERARCHY. (Seraphim,

Cherubim, Thrones.)
The spirits of the Seraphim serve to make thee respected and loved for
works of charity, for that which regardeth honours and other similar
things.
In matters of great importance they themselves act; but for matters base
and carnal, it is their subjects who do serve and operate.
THE ORDER OF THE SECOND HIERARCHY. Dominions,

Virtues, and Powers.
The property of the Dominions is to dominate; to procure liberty; to
vanquish enemies; to give authority over princes, and over all kinds of
persons, even ecclesiastics.
The Virtues are proper to give strength and force in all matters whether of
war or peace; and in all operations concerning the health of men, and in
all maladies for which the fatal hour hath not yet been written.
The Powers have the dominion over all the inferior spirits; and this is why
they can serve in all things in general, good or evil, and they are devoted
unto all things in general, good or evil; and they be straight and right in
execution, very punctual, very prompt, and exact in their operations.
THE ORDER OF THE THIRD HIERARCHY. Princes,

Archangels, and Angels.
The princes comprise spirits capable of giving treasures and riches, and
they or their dependants serve in all the operations, being a mass
277
composed of different orders, and they are sufficiently truthful.

The Archangels be proper to reveal all occult matters, and all kinds of
secret things, such as obscure points in Theology and the Law. They
serve with great diligence.
The Angels in general do operate each one according unto his quality.
There be an infinite number of them. They command the four princes and
the eight sub-princes in all kinds of operations. These latter having taken
their oath, observe that which they have promised, provided that the
operation one demandeth of them be in their power.
To cause the spirit to re-enter a dead body is a very great and difficult
operation, because in order to accomplish it the four sovereign princes
have to operate. Also it is necessary to take great care, and to pay heed
unto this warning, namely that we should not commence this operation
until the sick person is really at the point of death, so that his life is
absolutely despaired of. It should be so timed as to take place a little
while before the sick person giveth up the ghost; and thou shalt carry out
all that we have said hereon in the second book. But on no account
should we perform this operation to divert ourselves, nor for every class
of person; but only on occasions of the very utmost and most absolute
necessity.
This operation I myself have performed but twice in my life, namely once
for the Duke of Saxonia, and on another occasion in the case of a lady
whom the Emperor Sigismond loved passionately.
The familiar spirits are very prompt, and they are able to execute in most
minute detail all matters of a mechanical nature, with the which therefore
it is well to occupy them; as in historical painting; in making statues;
clocks; weapons; and other like matters; also in chemistry; and in causing
them to carry out commercial and business transactions under the form of
other persons; in making them transport merchandise and other goods
from one place to another; also to employ them in causing quarrels,
fights, homicides, and all kinds of evils, and malefic acts; also to convey
letters and messages of all kinds from one country to another; to deliver
prisoners; and in a thousand other ways which I have frequently
experimented.
These spirits should be treated according to their quality, and a distinction
should be made between a great spirit and one of a vile or insignificant
278
nature, but thou shouldest nevertheless alway conserve over them that
domination which is proper unto him who operateth. In speaking unto
them thou shalt give them no title; but shalt address them sometimes as
"you," sometimes as "thou"; and thou shalt never seek out expressions to
please them, and thou shalt always have with them a proud and
imperious air.
There be certain little terrestrial spirits that are simply detestable;
sorcerers and necromantic magicians generally avail themselves of their
services, for they operate only for evil, and in wicked and pernicious
things, and they be of no use soever. He who operateth could, should he
so wish, have a million such, but the sacred science which worketh
otherwise than necromancy in no way permitteth you to employ such as
be not constrained by an oath to obey you.
All that hath hitherto been said and laid down should suffice, and it is in
no wise to be doubted that he who executeth all these matters from point
to point, and who shall have the right intention to use this sacred science
unto the honour and glory of God almighty for his own good, and for that
of his neighbour, shall arrive with ease at the possession thereof; and
even matters the most difficult shall appear easy unto him. But human
nature is so depraved and corrupted, and so different from that which the
Lord hath created, that few persons, if any, do walk in the right way; and it
is so easy to prevaricate, and so difficult not to fail in an operation which
demandeth the whole (soul of a) man in (its) entirety. And in order not to
intimidate in any way him who shall resolve to undertake this operation, I
am about here to set down in writing the difficulties, temptations, and
hindrances which will be caused him by his own relatives; and all this will
be occasioned by the evil spirits so as to avoid having to submit
themselves, and humiliate themselves, and subject themselves unto Man,
their greatest enemy, seeing that they behold him in powerful condition
arriving at the enjoyment of that eternal glory which they themselves have
foolishly lost; and their rage is so great and their grief so poignant, that
there is in the world no evil which they be not ready to work, if God were
to permit them, they being always attracted by the idea of the destruction
of the Human Race. Therefore is it necessary to take courage and make
a constant resolution to resist in all things with intrepidity, and to earnestly
desire to obtain from God so great a grace in despite of men and of the
demon. Also beforehand thou shouldest arrange thine affairs in such wise
that they can in no way hinder thee, nor bring thee any disquietude in the
period of the six Moons, during which time there will occur the greatest
279
possible attempts at assault and damage unto thee which the keen and
subtle Enemy will bring to bear upon thee. He will cause thee to come in
contact with evil books, and wicked persons, who by diabolic methods
and tricks will seek to turn thee aside from this enterprise, even though it
be already commenced, by bringing before thee matters which in
appearance will seem of the greatest importance, but which really be only
built up on false (and evil) foundations. To such annoying accidents thou
shouldest steadily oppose thyself, by following out carefully the ample
instructions which I have given thee, thus banishing them from thee with
calmness and tranquillity so as to give no chance to the Enemy of
exercising his fraudulent tricks to interrupt thee.
Thy relations also, astonished at thy manner of life and thy retirement, will
make every effort to attempt to find out the reasons thereof. It will be
necessary to satisfy them by words full of affection, and to make them
think that time which engendereth change, also causeth men who are not
altogether ignorant persons to resolve at times to live by themselves. This
hath been the cause why so great a number of good and learned men
have retired into desert places, so that being separated from their own
relatives and from the world they might live tranquilly in prayer and
orisons to render themselves more worthy to obtain through the Grace of
the Lord a Gift so great and so perfect.
I further approve of thy possessing a Bible in the vulgar language, and
also the Psalms of David, for thine own use. Some person may here
reply,
"I understand the Latin, and I have no need of the common language". I
answer him that when we pray we ought not in any way to embarrass the
mind by having to interpret the Psalms; for at such a moment we should
be as much united as possible to God; and even the Psalms being in the
vulgar tongue when one readeth them they imprint themselves better on
the memory; and this is the true manner of particular prayer, if the person
praying be illiterate, for in saying the Psalms in Latin he would not know
what he was asking of God.
In these three books we shall not find the slightest thing which hath not a
true and necessary foundation. And we should take the greatest care,
and keep ourselves as we would from a deadly poison, from commencing
this operation at all, if we have not made a firm resolution to carry it
through unto the end. Because (in the contrary case) some notable evil
280
would befall him who had (carelessly) commenced the operation, and
who would then only too well comprehend that we may not make a mock
of the Lord.
Should it happen that God by his will and commandment should visit thee
and afflict thee with some malady which should render thee incapable of
finishing the operation according unto thy wish, thou having already
commenced it; then shouldest thou like an obedient servant submit
thyself humbly unto his holy will and commandment, reserving his grace
unto the time pleasing unto his divine majesty to grant it thee. And thou
shalt cease from thine operation, so as to finish it on another more
favourable occasion, and meanwhile thou shalt devote thyself unto the
cure of thy body. And such a case ought in no way to afflict thee, for the
secrets of God are impenetrable, and he performeth, permitteth, and
operateth all things for the best and for our good, although it may be not
understanded of us.
Hereinafter will I set down the key of this operation, which is the only thing
which facilitateth this operation to enjoy the vision of the holy angels, by
placing the symbols given hereafter upon the brow of the child and of him
who performeth the operation, as I have said in the first book, to which
one can easily refer.
It is not fitting for me even to reveal a part of this science and its
properties; and to appropriate unto myself that which appertaineth unto a
person of a great mind and so far above me. In teaching it even, I have
far exceeded that which I should have done, in having given unto thee the
two last symbols, but what will not paternal love and affection do?
Endeavour only to obey me and to follow out my precepts from point to
point, according to the manner in which I have given them unto thee in
writing; keeping alway the fear of God before thine eyes. Also forget not
the slightest thing which I have said unto thee in these three books, for
with the help of God who ruleth and governeth all things, and reigneth
gloriously in Heaven and upon Earth, and whose divine justice shineth in
Hell; if thou hast recourse unto him and puttest all thy confidence in his
divine mercy, thou shalt obtain this holy science and magic whose power
is inexpressible. Then, my son! and whosoever may attain thereunto;
remember to praise and glorify the Lord, and to pray unto him that he may
be willing to deign and accord unto me his holy glory, the place of
veritable rest, whereof to me while yet in this valley of misery he hath
281
granted a large share through his goodness and mercy; and I pray the
Lord also that he may be willing to grant it unto thee also with his holy
benediction, and unto all those who by thy means will arrive at the
possession of this sacred magic, and who will use it according unto his
holy will. May God deign, say I, to grant unto such all temporal goods,
and a good death in his holy kingdom!
SO MAY IT BE!
End
282

The Sacred Magic

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

The Sacred Magic

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

The Sacred Magic

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What is the structure of the document?

What is the structure of the document?

What topics are discussed in the document?

What topics are discussed in the document?

www.deeptrancenow.

The Sacred Magic

INTRODUCTION BY S.L. MAC GREGOR MATHERS.

THE FIRST BOOK

THE SECOND BOOK

CHAPTER 11. Concerning the selection of the place.

THE THIRD BOOK

Introduction by S. L. Mac Gregor Mathers

to Abraham, with this difference, that the latter successfully passed

the French verb "tutoyer," = "to be very familiar with, to be on extremely

First book: = Advice and autobiography; both addressed by the

The enormous historical importance of such men as our author is always

He expressly states that he obtained both his wife, and a treasure of

unwillingly admit) when overcome, were conquered by superior numbers,

That these latter as a punishment have been condemned to the

invariably insisted upon in the operations of evocation described and

language but one's mother tongue, appear at first sight to be damned

and is to be used for obtaining the love of a maiden.

In the Key of Solomon it is (as being a pentacle) inscribed within a double

Qabalah. It is well to examine what is here meant. The Qabalah itself is

monkey or a parrot might act; in fact such closely resemble animals in

fearful potencies as Amaymon, Egyn, and Beelzebub, would probably

In conclusion I will only say that I have written this explanatory

Appendix A Hebrew Alphabet

Employment of a child-clairvoyant by Cagliostro.

THE FIRST BOOK

BEQUEATHED BY ABRAHAM UNTO LAMECH HIS SON.

THE FIRST BOOK OF THE HOLY MAGIC.

THE FIRST CHAPTER

THE SECOND CHAPTER

understanding and opened mine eyes to see and admire, to contemplate,

THE THIRD CHAPTER

On the 13th day of February, in the year 1397, we commenced our

THE FOURTH CHAPTER

Chaldean language in a loving manner, inviting me to go with him into his

THE FIFTH CHAPTER

THE SIXTH CHAPTER

One old scribbler of symbols gave me many enchantments which only

Afterwards he did manifest unto me the regimen of the mystery of that

THE SEVENTH CHAPTER

THE EIGHTH CHAPTER

I delivered also the Count Frederick by the means of 2000 artificial

THE NINTH CHAPTER

THE TENTH CHAPTER

THE ELEVENTH CHAPTER

himself, if thou wishest to give it unto him, it is necessary to test his

THE TWELFTH CHAPTER

END OF THE FIRST BOOK.

THE SECOND BOOK

THE SECOND BOOK OF THE SACRED MAGIC.

THE FIRST CHAPTER

THE SECOND CHAPTER

THE THIRD CHAPTER

THE FOURTH CHAPTER

THE FIFTH CHAPTER